JP6260524B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one provided with a plurality of winning openings through which a winning ball is paid out by winning a ball. Some of these conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls, by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

However, there is a possibility that Yu technique becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the game becomes monotonous.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction can enter, and a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, A variable entry means that can be changed to a second variable state in which a game ball is harder to enter than the first variable state, a determination means that executes determination based on establishment of a determination condition, and a determination by the determination means Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable pitching means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state based on a specific determination result; and the specific direction The game ball that has been fired on is provided at a position where it can flow down, and the specific flow path that branches into the first flow path and the second flow path, and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter Based on the entrance means provided at the position and the game ball entering the entrance means. In addition, the privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player, and the game ball that has flowed into the specific channel is more likely to flow down the first channel than the second channel. Variable means that can be changed to a state and a second state in which it is easier to flow down the second flow path than the first flow path, and during the execution of the variable game, the variable pitching means is the second while being variable in a variable state, said varying means is varied before Symbol first state, while the variable ball entrance means is variable before Symbol first variable state, said varying means pre Symbol second state Variable control means capable of performing control to be varied, and the first flow path is launched in the specific direction, and at least game balls that have not entered the variable ball entry means can flow in. It is provided in the position.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in claim 1 gaming machine described in the Ru comprising a firing unit capable of emitting a game ball.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first variable state in which a game ball launched in a specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter and the game ball can enter, and the game is more than the first variable state. The variable entry means that can be changed to the second variable state where the ball is difficult to enter, the discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means gave a specific discrimination result. On the basis of the above, variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state, and a game ball launched in the specific direction includes: A specific flow path that is provided at a position where it can flow down and that branches into a first flow path and a second flow path, and a ball that is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. And the player has an advantage based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege, a first state in which a game ball that has flowed into the specific channel is more likely to flow down the first channel than the second channel, and the first channel And variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it easier to flow down the second flow path, and during the execution of the variable game, while the variable pitching means is changed to the second variable state . , the variable means is varied before Symbol first state, while the variable ball entrance means is variable before Symbol first variable state, capable of executing the control for varying said variable means prior Symbol second state Variable control means, and the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have been launched in the specific direction and have not entered the variable ball entry means can flow in. It is.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the Yu technique becomes monotonous.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which illustrated the display screen on which the right-handed navigator was displayed, (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen on which the right-handed warning image was displayed. (A) is the figure which illustrated the display screen in the middle of jackpot, (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen when a ball | bowl enters a great value winning opening during jackpot. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen on which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed into the storage apparatus when the storage valve is closed, (b) flowed into the storage apparatus when the storage valve was open | released It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a sphere. It is a figure which shows the upstream side among the paths | routes provided in the right side of the game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the paths | routes provided in the right side of the game board. (A) is a figure showing the state where the 1st specific prize opening was opened, and (b) is the figure showing the state where the 2nd specific prize opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball | bowl in the state in which the 1st specific winning opening was closed, (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the sphere in the state in which the 1st specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball | bowl in the state in which the 2nd specific winning opening was closed, (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the sphere in the state in which the 2nd specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which entered the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus in the state in which the probability variation entrance opening was closed, (b) is a figure with the probability variation entrance entrance opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which entered the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus in the state which exists. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific prize-winning opening | mouth in the 12th round of jackpot A, and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus, (b) is 12 of jackpot B It is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening in the round, and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the hit notification process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which illustrated the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) is the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is open | released. FIG. It is a front view of the storage device in the second embodiment. (A) is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in the 2nd embodiment is closed is guided to a large value winning opening, (b) It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in 2 embodiment is closed is guided to a small value prize opening. It is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed into the storage apparatus in case the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open | released. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of the storage performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of cancellation performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen in the jackpot in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a downstream side among the paths | routes provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of a storage device and a 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where a slide member of a modification of a 1st embodiment projected to the front view front side, and (b) is a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where the slide member of the example was buried in the front view back side. It is a figure which shows the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error alerting | reporting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit notification process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state which the ball stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment was a disadvantageous arrangement | positioning for a player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state by which the ball stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became an arrangement | positioning advantageous for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | release suggestion display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and the others are (Not shown), rails 61 and 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal winning port ( The through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, the storage device 600, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are obtained by the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are won, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 is referred to as “special design 1 lottery” and is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be called is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, the releasing operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until 10 balls are won. More specifically, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, so that a larger amount of winning balls are paid out than usual.

  The second variable winning device 650 includes two types of entrances (probability entrance entrance 654 and normal entrance) for determining the added value after the jackpot given after the end of the special gaming state. Mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 in a special game state, a “special symbol high probability state” is given as an added value after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, if the ball has never entered the probability variation entrance 654 during the special game state, “ordinary symbol time-short state” is given as the added value after the jackpot. Note that there are two types of special symbol jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B” (see FIG. 18B). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the ease of entering the ball into the probability changing entrance 654 is varied.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Easy state. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 15 rounds (15R big hit). Further, in a special game state, when a ball enters the probability variation entrance 654, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol high from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. Moves to the probability state (during special symbol change). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, as a value added after the jackpot, the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the jackpot ends. In the meantime, it shifts to the short time state of normal symbols. In addition, when it shifts to the short time state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol together. This low probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although details will be described later, in the “big hit B”, it becomes easier to make the ball enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state (during the big hit state) as compared to the “big hit A”. That is, since “big hit B” is more likely to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the big hit, the big hit is likely to be made again at short intervals after the big hit. Therefore, “big hit B” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than “big hit A”.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the “special symbol low probability state” means a time when the special symbol is not being probable, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the special symbol probabilistic change. In addition, the normal symbol time-short state (short time medium) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) has been increased) that is neither a probability change of a special symbol nor a short time of a normal symbol.

  During the probable change of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set in comparison with. When the electric accessory 640a is in an opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 in comparison with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction. That is, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction The number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be increased more than the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and It is good also as what changes at least one among the frequency | counts of opening of the electrically-driven accessory 640a. In addition, during the change of the probability of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. Only the hit probability of the second pattern) may be increased as compared with the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is granted after the special gaming state ends, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but is not limited to this, The number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times after the special gaming state ends, and after the special symbol lottery ends 10 times. May be configured to be set in a normal state. In addition, the number of times that the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to 10 and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, the normal symbol is shortened until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. However, the short time period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times and may be arbitrarily determined.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, the special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is held for a maximum of 4 times for each type of entrance, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, the upper, middle, and lower Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these three symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the liquid crystal display, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-7, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. First, FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area segment setting and effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery result performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which are even numbers, are added are arranged. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit B”, any number among all the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including the odd number is added Fluctuation display in which symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been executed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (the 1st symbol display device 37), The number of entered balls is held up to 4 times each, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 4B shows an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entrance to the first entrance 64 is four. When a reserve ball corresponding to the entrance to the second entrance 640 is generated, a reserve ball number symbol having a different form from the retained ball number symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. Is done. Thereby, the player can easily determine how many reserved balls corresponding to entering the first entrance 64 and how many reserved balls corresponding to entering the second entrance 640 exist. Can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5 (a), there is a display (right-handed navigation) that prompts the third symbol display device 81 to strike a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. The display contents when it occurs will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is in a short-time state. It becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by launching (right hitting). In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a big win is made by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a “hit B” as compared to a case where a big win is obtained by a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed hitting in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or the short time state of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the probable state of the special symbol or the short state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits the right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol probable state and the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state of the special symbol or in the short-time state of the normal symbol, the player can display the image (right-handed navigation) illustrated in FIG. And it is configured to ensure that the benefits of being in a short time state of normal symbols are obtained.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-handed navigation, a character “Aim for the right !!” is displayed on the small region Ds3 in the sub display region Ds, and the characters pointing right and up are displayed above and below the character. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can be surely acquired the benefits of being in the special symbol probability changing state and the normal symbol time-saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5 (b) shows that the player hits the right hand even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball (flow path) to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that it is being executed. More specifically, this message is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right stroke in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not changed or a normal symbol is in a short time state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be less likely to be opened in a normal state (even if a right hand is made, it is difficult to make a ball enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if a right strike is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a lottery of a special symbol is reduced as compared with a case where a left strike strikes a ball aiming at the first entrance 64. That is, if a right strike is made in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from losing by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging left-handed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is making a right stroke in the normal state, “warning” is performed on the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters “Please play left-handed!” Are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made aware that the player should not make a right stroke (should make a left stroke). In addition, the hall clerk also checks whether or not there is a right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5B) to determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular gaming method for making a right-handed game in a normal state. It can be easily distinguished.

  In addition, as a method for determining whether or not a right hand is made, the determination is made based on whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball can flow when the right hand is made. . More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning ports 601 and 602 or the out ports 603a to 603c provided in the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) When it is determined that the ball has passed through the provided entrance switch), it is determined that the player is making a right turn.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) flows down the ball to the general winning opening 601 according to the gaming state (see FIG. 9A) and the ball to the general winning opening 602. It is set to two types of states, that is, a state that is easy to cause (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big win state) (special symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time-short state, normal state), the ball is easily set to flow down to the general winning a prize opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening that has fewer (for example, three) winning balls than the general winning opening 602 when a ball enters. For this reason, even if right-handed in the normal state, there are few merits to enter the ball into the storage device 600 (the holding ball cannot be increased). In other words, when the right-hand strike is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced and the number of possessed balls is also reduced, so that a disadvantage is increased for the player. Therefore, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a game method that is disadvantageous to the player (a game method in which the player makes a right-hand hit in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

  It should be noted that as a determination element for determining whether or not to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only a winning at a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in a normal state but also a winning The reason why it is determined whether or not to enter a difficult general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 or the like is because the possibility of illegal games is taken into consideration. In other words, in a normal state, by continuously entering balls illegally into a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of payout balls (for example, 15 payouts), without a big hit. There is a possibility that a fraudulent game method for obtaining a large number of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is left-handed (right A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) that prompts the user not to make a hit is displayed. Thereby, suppression with respect to an unauthorized game can be aimed at.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the ball entrances (general winning ports 601, 602, out ports 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in a normal state. The right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed on the screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big win state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) a general winning port (large value winning port) 602 with a lot of payout balls, It may be configured that the right-handed warning image is displayed by determining that it is being performed. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence / absence of fraud simply by confirming the presence / absence of a right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special gaming state (big win state), the hall computer is illegal. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 on which the fraud is being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player hits the right hand on the basis of detecting the entrance to each entrance (general winning entrances 601, 602, out entrances 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the user is performing, the method for determining whether or not the right-handed player is performing is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting right when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 A known sensor capable of detecting that the ball has passed may be provided on the top, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is making a right strike.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special gaming state (during the big hit state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of jackpot. As shown in the figure, when the jackpot is reached, for example, an image in which a boy character 710 finds a treasure box 715 filled with treasure is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that a player can acquire in a special game state (a jackpot state). This display can amplify the joy of winning the prize ball, so that it can give satisfaction to the big hit. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  A display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left part of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, characters “ROUND3” are displayed in the display area 714. By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of jackpot. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining jackpot rounds.

  Furthermore, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as in the special symbol probability changing state or the normal symbol time-short state. That is, the characters “Aim for the right !!” are displayed for the small area Ds3, and right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made aware that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the big hit state). be able to. If left-handed is made in spite of the special game state (hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is released in the special game state (hit state). The ball cannot enter the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. That is, a large amount of prize balls cannot be obtained, and the player loses. Therefore, in this embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special gaming state (big hit state), thereby prompting the player to make a right-handed strike. Thereby, it is configured so that the player can win a prize ball in the jackpot.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winning (winning) in the general winning opening 602 is formed. In the winning number display area MA, for example, characters “EXTRA BONUS × 10” are displayed as shown in FIG. The character “EXTRA BONUS” means that the winning ball is obtained by a method different from the winning ball obtained by entering the ball into the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a. ing. Specifically, this means that a winning ball is obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602. The character “× 10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball is entered 10 times into the general winning opening 602 in the first to third rounds.

  In addition, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the characters “EXTRA BONUS × 10”, and characters “EXTRA BONUS gate open” are displayed above it. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (release state). Further, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters “Aim!” Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. . By this balloon, it is possible to recognize that it is advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be acquired) when the player enters a ball into the general winning opening 602.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big win state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during the jackpot, the letters “GET” are displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which a sphere enters the ball is displayed at a location corresponding to a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS × 10” to “EXTRA BONUS × 11”. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the winning ball is obtained by entering the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

  In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is different from the winning at the first specific winning slot 65a and the second specific winning slot 650a in the jackpot. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the game has been acquired. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of an increase in the number of times of “EXTRA BONUS” (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602). Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handed warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when left-handed in the special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that left-handed is performed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the large display area, a character “Warning” is displayed in a large size, and a character “Aim at the attacker by right-handed!” Is displayed below the character “Warning”. By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be surely acquired by the player in the special game state (big win state).

  Note that whether or not the player is left-handed is determined based on whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is left-handed, and a left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passing sensor that detects the passage of a sphere is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image ( You may comprise so that FIG.7 (a)) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image that is displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, a case where a ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected in spite of a special gaming state (big win state) or a special gaming state (big hit). When a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is detected in spite of not being in the state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (b), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the word “warning” is displayed large in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the lower part of the screen, the text “Please call a gate error agent” is displayed. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can promptly request repairs or the like from a hall clerk or the like.

  Also, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of prize balls that are always paid out by illegally changing the wiring or the like, The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraud simply by confirming the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, it fixes to the state which a ball | bowl is easy to enter to a general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602, and aims at suppression with respect to the fraud act which increases a ball | bowl without going through big hits by aiming at the storage device 600. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Fluctuation display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter when the probability of the special symbol or the normal symbol is shorter than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed and during normal time.

  It should be noted that, during special symbol probabilities or during normal symbol time shortening, the hit probability is increased, or the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are increased to the second entrance 640 by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the 2nd symbol is set shorter than that in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or in the normal symbol time, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entrance slot 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) wins a lottery. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. You may make it carry out using a part of apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of assembling of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to one and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball wins the first winning slot 64, a first winning slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 as viewed from the front (below the normal entrance 67), a second entrance 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second prize opening switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) makes a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 may be different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 640. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the first entrance 64 is 3 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 is 5 Also good.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state. (Enlarged state) and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640 easily.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during the probability change of a special symbol and the time of a normal symbol than in the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol is also short. In the display, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed. Therefore, the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a will be in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second entrance 640 when the special symbol is being changed and when the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is reached, the probability of a jackpot (spot hit B) that facilitates entering the ball into the probability variation entrance 654 during the special gaming state is the second entrance 640. When the ball is won, it is set higher than when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  During normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640, so the first entrance with no electric accessory provided. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”). Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shorter or shorter, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened by passing the ball through the normal entrance 67, so that the second entry Since it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball is launched toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the normal entrance It is advantageous for the player to pass the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and aim to become a big hit B by winning the second ball opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is being changed, the normal symbol is being shortened, or in the normal state). The person can change the way the ball is fired between left-handed and right-handed. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second entrance 640), and is a horizontally elongated first specific prize opening at a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is won by a special symbol lottery performed due to winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening and closing operation of the first specific prize winning opening 65a is executed in the special gaming state rounds 1 to 11 and rounds 13 to 15. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided above the second variable winning device 650a. . The opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting to the front side of the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is won and the 12th round is reached, the open / closed version covering the second specific prize opening 650a slides toward the back when viewed from the front, and is buried in the back of the game board 13, so that the ball is 2 An open state in which a ball can be entered into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14B).

  As described above, the ball that has entered the second specific prize opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the big hit) enters the probability variable entrance 654 provided in the second variable prize winning device 650. After the jackpot is over, it shifts to a special symbol probable state. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific prize opening 650a in the special game state, or if the ball enters the second specific prize slot 650a, all the balls enter the normal entrance 655. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the normal symbol shifts to the short time state.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. In addition to the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, other winning ports may be provided as the winning ports opened in the special gaming state. Conversely, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at an arbitrary position.

  A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of entrances (general winning entrances 601, 602, and out entrances 603a to 603c), and causes the entered balls to flow down to any entrance. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store only one sphere that has entered the interior (stops the flow down). Further, the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side of the front view, and to which entrance the ball that the player flows into (enters) the storage device 600 enters. It is comprised so that it can confirm easily. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured such that a sphere can enter the inside thereof via a guide channel 605. The storage device 600 is configured such that when a player hits the right, one ball enters about three of the balls that have been launched. The ball that has not entered the guide channel 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flows down toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. That is, in the special game state, a part of the balls launched by the player toward the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a enter the storage device 600 through the guide channel 605. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, two types of flow paths branched by a branch member 604 are provided in the storage device 600 downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side in front view. Most of the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 606 enter a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by this detection switch 601a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. In addition, on the left and right sides of the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601, the balls that have not entered the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 in spite of flowing down the guide channel 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided. These out-ports can prevent (suppress) the accumulation of spheres inside the storage device 600 and reliably discharge the spheres that have flowed down the guide channel 606. In addition, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are provided in the out ports 603a and 603b, respectively, similarly to the general winning port (small value winning port) 601. These detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 can accurately determine the number of discharged spheres.

  Inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 607 through which a sphere can flow is provided on the right side of the front view. Most of the game balls that have flowed down the guide channel 607 enter a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by this detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, the number of 15 winning balls is paid out. That is, more balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601. it can. Note that out-ports 603b and 603c are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. These out-ports prevent (suppress) spheres that have not entered the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and the spheres that have flowed down the guide channel 607 It can be discharged reliably. In addition, the out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown) similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The number of discharged spheres can be accurately determined by the detection switch 603c1.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is set in a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 when a special gaming state (a big win state) is entered. In a state other than the special game state (big win state), the state is set such that it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to obtaining a large amount of prize balls by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, a general winning opening (high value winning prize) in the storage device 600 is obtained. Mouth) It is configured such that a winning ball can be obtained by winning the ball to 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special gaming state (a jackpot state) can be increased, so that the player's merit due to the jackpot can be enhanced. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the game more happily to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in a state other than the special gaming state (big win state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a and the number of prize balls to be relatively paid out. It is set in a state in which a ball is easy to enter a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there are few merits of entering the ball into the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special gaming state, it always tries to receive the large amount of payout by aiming at the storage device 600. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if the right hand is executed in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by payout based on the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to make a left strike in the normal state.

  The guide channel 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607 a can project the front side of the front view so as to block the guide channel 607, and prevent the sphere that has progressed to the guide channel 607 from flowing down. That is, the sphere can be stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the solenoid 610 for the storage device, the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side in the front view (a state where the guide channel 607 is blocked), and the storage valve 607a is on the back side in the front view. It is configured to be switchable to an embedded state (a state where a sphere can flow down the guide channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out toward the guide channel 606 by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set sufficiently high so that the sphere stored on the upper portion of the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two types of states that the storage valve 607a can take. FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the front side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the ball | bowl which entered the storage apparatus 600 in the state buried in.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, more than half of the lower end of the guide channel 605 overlaps with the upper end of the guide channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide channel 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guide channel 605 and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the guide channel 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 605 easily travels to the guide channel 607.

  The sphere that has traveled to the guide channel 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a, and stops at the top of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). In the state where the sphere is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored), when another sphere newly flows down the guide channel 605, it flows down the guide channel 605 newly. And the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a contact (interference). Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (downward direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guide channel 605 changes.

  Since the guide channel 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide channel 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly introduced into the guide channel 605. In most cases, the ball stops on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide channel 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, and thus repels the left side as viewed from the front. Accordingly, the sphere newly flowing down the guide channel 605 proceeds to the guide channel 606 provided on the left side in front view. As described above, most of the balls that have flowed down the guide channel 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is three). That is, in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side of the front view and the sphere cannot flow down the guide channel 607 (a state where the guide channel 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are generally The player enters a winning entrance (small value winning entrance) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the rear side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing that prevents the flow of the sphere that has advanced to the guide channel 607, and therefore the guide channel 607 The ball that has traveled to the bottom flows down the guide channel 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is a winning opening with a relatively large number of payout balls (15), and therefore has many advantages for the player to win.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be in a state (see FIG. 9B) in which a sphere can flow down the guide channel 607 when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in a special gaming state, by making a right strike, a ball is awarded to the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific prize opening 650a, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained and the right shot is ejected. A part of the balls that have been awarded to the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 in the storage device 600 allows a prize ball to be obtained. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special gaming state (a jackpot state) can be increased, so that the player's merit due to the jackpot can be enhanced. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the game more happily to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big win state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a and is relatively paid out. It is set in a state in which a ball can easily enter a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, there are few merits of entering the ball into the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special gaming state, it always tries to receive the large amount of payout by aiming at the storage device 600. A gaming method can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding channel 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning port) 601, and the sphere that has flowed down the guiding channel 607 enters the general winning port 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning holes is provided on the downstream side of each guiding channel, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning holes to be entered. Also good. Thereby, even if it flows down the guide flow path 606, many prize balls can be acquired by making it enter into a winning opening with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until a ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when a ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that a sphere can be stored in the guide channel 607. You may comprise so that a ball | bowl may be stored in the middle of 607. FIG. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide channel 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). By comprising in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  In this embodiment, one sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which two or more spheres can be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or arranged so as to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port from which a prize ball is paid out may be provided instead of the out port. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball into each prize opening may be varied. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, the prize ball has six winning ports, the prize ball has ten winning ports instead of the out port 603b, and the winning ball instead of the out port 603c. May have 12 winning openings. Thereby, it is possible to observe more interestingly when the sphere flows down the guide channel 606 or in which winning opening the guide channel 607 enters the ball. Further, a member that can change the flow direction of a ball, such as a nail, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 and the guide channel 607 so that a winning opening through which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when a sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to observe the direction of the sphere more interestingly until the sphere enters one of the winning holes. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a entrance where a ball can easily enter by a hall clerk. Therefore, the ball exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a route when the player injects a ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when the player hits the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion upstream of the storage device 600 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 10, a normal entrance 67 is provided in the upper part of the right channel (path) of the game board 13. As described above, when a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol win after the variation effect for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 provided downstream of the normal entrance 67 is provided. It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds × 1 time or 1 second × 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, a right-handed ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. As described above, when the probability of a special symbol is changing or when the normal symbol is short, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening period of the electric accessory is lengthened. 2 The ball enters the entrance 640 easily. Therefore, by performing the right strike, a special symbol lottery can be received without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Further, a first variable winning device 65 is provided on the downstream side of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, when the player hits the right side, the spheres that have flowed down to the downstream side of the right path (flow path) do not flow into the storage device 600 (enter the ball) but flow down to the downstream. 1 Flows down toward the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that has flowed down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and has not entered the first specific winning port 65a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

  In this way, the ball can flow down toward the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player making a right strike. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can make the ball enter the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a only by making a right stroke. You can win a prize ball. In addition, a part of the ball launched with the aim of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a enters the storage device 600. As described above, in the special game state (big win state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can win more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the game more happily to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable in the front view front direction. When the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball that has flowed down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific prize opening 65a has a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls in rounds 1 to 11 and 13 to 15 in the special gaming state (big win state). Open until you win. Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning port 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out with respect to one ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning port 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding to the back side when viewed from the front. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened, and the game ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big win state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning port 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of a ball that has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 to the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting right will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the ball reaches the first specific winning port 65a with the first specific winning port 65a closed, the ball must enter the first specific winning port 65a. Since it cannot be, it falls into the space in front of the 1st specific winning opening 65a (refer Fig.13 (a)). And the ball | bowl which fell to the near side of the 1st specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided under the 1st specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the sphere reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a opened, as shown in FIG. The opening part of 1 specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65 c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball discharge port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning port 65a Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball discharge port 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning port 65a enter the ball discharge port 65c. Can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 to the second specific winning opening 650a by hitting right will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), when the ball reaches the second specific prize opening 650a in a state where the second specific prize opening 650a is closed, the ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the second specific prize opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). And the ball | bowl which fell to the left side of the 2nd specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out port 66 (refer FIG. 2) provided in the left of the 2nd specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific prize opening 650a in a state where the second specific prize opening 650a is opened, as shown in FIG. 2 The opening part of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650 c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, a winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning port 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface portion 650b of the second variable prize winning device 650 is inclined toward the ball outlet 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific prize outlet 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. Can be balled. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

  Next, the structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in a special game state (a big hit state), when a ball enters the probability variable entrance ball port 654 provided in the second variable winning device 650, After the jackpot is over, it is configured to shift to a probable change state of a special symbol. The probability variation inlet 654 is provided in one of the two channels (the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the guide channel 652). It has been. Further, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the sphere flows is provided at the upper ends of the two flow paths. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the sphere cannot advance and to open the other flow path so that the sphere can travel. It has been. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated about the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). Can be switched.

  FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are diagrams illustrating the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide channel 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c cannot be advanced to the guide channel 652 by being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere proceeds to the guide channel 653 (see FIG. 15A). A normal entrance 655 is provided downstream of the guide channel 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A, a sphere cannot enter the probability variation entrance 654. In this embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured as shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the arrangement in which the guide channel 653 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c can travel to the guide channel 652 without being blocked by the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guide channel 653 and enters the probability variation entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

  By entering a ball into the probability variation entrance 654, it is set to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specific prize opening 650a is opened is completed, a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the gaming state after the jackpot is executed in subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball has entered the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12th round, the third symbol display device 81 has a display effect that suggests that the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol in the 13th to 15th rounds. Executed in On the other hand, if the ball has not entered the probable entrance ball opening 654 in the 12th round, the third symbol display device 81 has a display effect that suggests that the normal symbol shifts to the short time state in the 13th to 15th rounds. Executed in In this way, by setting the round in which the big 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened as the 12th round, it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing the suggestion effect that suggests the gaming state after the jackpot in the remaining rounds of the jackpot be able to.

  As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600. The easier it is to flow in, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in 12 rounds of big hit B. Conversely, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the easiness of the flow of the sphere into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the rate of entering the probability variation entrance 654. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at an inlet portion of the storage device 600 may be mentioned. That is, as the two nails provided at the entrance portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to approach each other, the sphere is less likely to pass between the two nails, and thus the sphere is less likely to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, the ball easily enters the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the big hit B, so that it can be easily shifted to the probability variation state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to move away from each other, the more easily the balls pass between the two nails, so the balls easily flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, the ball easily flows into the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the big hit B, so that it is difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, the specs of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the probable change state of the special symbol) can be varied. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. Thus, the jackpot B is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special gaming state (big hit state) than the jackpot A. In addition, the relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific prize winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing changes in time of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot A. The upper graph of FIG. 16 (a) shows the time change (whether open or closed) of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a. FIG. 16 (a) The lower diagram shows the time change of the channel switching valve 650d (whether the left guide channel 652 or the right guide channel 653 is opened downstream of the ball outlet 650c). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the 12th round is started, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and is set to an open state based on the passage of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the 12th round is completed. Specifically, the ball is set to the open state until 10 balls enter the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a or until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. Is done. When the twelfth round is completed, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (a jackpot state) ends, and then reaches 12 jackpot rounds.

  Further, in the 12th round of jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side is closed and the sphere can flow down the left flow path 652 (FIG. 15). (See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round, and the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the reverse direction based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and the ball is set in a state in which the sphere can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). In addition, since this switching operation | movement is complete | finished in the period for 0.5 second or less, before a 2nd specific winning opening (2nd large opening | mouth) 650a is open | released, a flow path can be switched.

  Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state where the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the sphere can flow down the guide channel 653 is the next big hit, and continues until eleventh round is completed. Then, based on the fact that the eleventh round is completed and an interval period of 3 seconds is reached, the ball is set in a state in which the sphere can flow down (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, for most of the period when the player is playing a game, the ball is allowed to pass through the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d. The sphere can be set to pass through the guide channel 652 from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if an illegal act of entering the ball into the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is performed except in the 12th round of the special game state, the ball enters the probability changing ball opening 654. Since the ball can be prevented (suppressed), it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the probability variation state of the special symbol is illegally acquired.

  Note that the timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the state where the guide channel 652 is opened at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the 11th round ends (for example, after the interval starts) It may be configured to switch (when 0.5 seconds have elapsed). Accordingly, the period during which the guide channel 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter time, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning port 650a is closed. Even if it makes it, it can prevent (suppress) that the ball | bowl enters into the probability variation entrance 654. That is, cheating can be prevented.

  Thus, in the 12th round of jackpot A, the period during which the guide flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a are open. The opening pattern of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period is not overlapped substantially (overlaps only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the 12th round is started). Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot is A, since the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), it is difficult to set the special symbol probability variation state after the jackpot.

  Note that the reason why the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for 0.2 seconds immediately after the 12th round is started is to make it difficult to recognize that it is a big hit A immediately after the 12th round starts. It is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b). However, in the big hit B where the ball easily enters the probability variation ball opening 654, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be expected to be a jackpot B by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16 (b), a description will be given of changes in time of the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the big hit B. The upper graph in FIG. 16 (b) shows a change in time (whether open or closed) of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16 (b). The lower diagram shows the time change of the channel switching valve 650d (whether the guide channel 652 on the left downstream side of the bulb outlet 650c is opened or the guide channel 653 on the right side is opened). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 12th round, and is set to the closed state based on the passage of 5 seconds. Even when 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before 5 seconds elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a Closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (a jackpot state) ends, and then reaches 12 jackpot rounds.

  Further, as described above, in the 12th round of jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the eleventh round, the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d is closed, so that the sphere can flow down the left guide channel 652. (See FIG. 15B). Then, when 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the reverse direction. That is, the guide channel 652 is closed by the channel switching valve 650d, and the ball is set in a state in which the sphere can flow down the guide channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state where the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained.

  Thus, in the 12th round of jackpot B, the period during which the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are opened. The opening pattern of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period of time overlapped for a maximum of 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases where the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be entered into the probability variation entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that the probability change state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. It becomes easy.

  Note that the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this. Any pattern may be set as long as it is possible to set a pattern in which a ball is difficult to enter. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the form of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the sphere can flow down the guidance flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. The flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 after 5 seconds) (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to an arbitrary round. Furthermore, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set. As a result, the chances of entering the ball into the probability variation entrance 654 can be increased, so that the probability variation state of the special symbol can be made easier after the big hit B is completed. Therefore, in spite of winning the jackpot B, the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the motivation for the player's game is reduced. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out ports 603a to 603c is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Run.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per-random number counter C1, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each big hit type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, when the jackpot is A, most of the period during which the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the twelfth round is provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 653 is configured to be open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere flow down to the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere is input to the probability variation inlet 654 provided downstream of the guide channel 652. It becomes difficult to enter. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it is difficult to shift to a special symbol probability changing state after the jackpot.

  Further, a jackpot B is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, when the jackpot B is reached, the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the guidance provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 652 is configured to overlap with the open period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained simply by allowing the ball to enter the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a is open. The sphere can be caused to flow down to a guide channel 652 provided on the left side. As described above, the probability variation inlet 654 is provided downstream of the guide channel 652. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0-19” The jackpot A is defined in association with it (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 99”, the big hit B is associated and defined. That is, the number of determination values for the big hit B is larger when the big win is won by the special symbol 2 lottery than when the special symbol 1 is the big hit. Therefore, it is easy to become the big hit B when it is a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if it is a big win, the special symbol is likely to become a big hit B, and the special symbol is probable after the jackpot ends. Since the big hit B, which tends to be in a state, is easily repeated, it is easy for the player to acquire a large number of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64 comprising one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas) and a second entry A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the mouth 640 is provided, and in each of these areas, the timing of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is provided. In addition, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of the symbol), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, if the special symbol is in a probable variation state, whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is “0-9” in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is determined and any one of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 399”, the judgment value that is a big hit is 10 “0 to 9”. Probability becomes 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “200”, and if it is “200”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 “0 to 399”, the judgment value that is a big hit is only one of “200”, so that the special symbol has a low probability state. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

  In this embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. And if the random number is any one of “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is “hit A”. In addition, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. Furthermore, the big hit type when the special symbol 2 is lottery and the random number value is any one of “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big hit A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery and the random value is any one of “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  In the present embodiment, the number of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Further, the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 between the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is a lottery. May be. With this configuration, the amount of data in the first hit type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above. ing.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various types of “out (for a long time)”, “out (for a short time)”, “out of normal reach”, and “out of super reach” are specified as variation patterns for out. As a variation pattern for jackpot, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c. In addition, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C), and a normal symbol hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types for high probability (period of normal symbol time-short state and period of special symbol probability variation state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)) and included in each. The number of random numbers that are jackpots is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of winning random numbers, the probability of winning when the normal symbol has a low probability (normal state of normal symbol) and when the normal symbol has a high probability (normal symbol time short state) Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-28” (202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). reference). Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is high (when the normal symbols are short and short, and during special symbols), the range is “5-204”. . These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. However, the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  Here, details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation valid flag 203o , A probability variation valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, an hour / medium counter 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first entrance. Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning of 64 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning in the second entrance 640 are stored, respectively. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). 3 is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the three-symbol display device 81. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls held in the second entrance 640 and stored is stored. Since it is only different, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol normal display (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a special symbol probability change state (the special symbol is being changed). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. In this embodiment, when a probability change setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). The probability variation flag 203g is set to off when a special symbol lottery is won and a start of the jackpot is set. In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF and a normal power interruption occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power interruption occurs is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability variation game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the probability variation entrance port 654 during the special game state (big hit state). . When a game ball enters the probability variation entrance 654, the entrance is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  When the probability variation setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is shut off. May be configured to return to the officially set to ON. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power supply is cut off can be determined by whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch in one round in the jackpot state (the 12th round in the present embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged based on the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by incrementing by one when passing the probability variation switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). Further, after executing the process of determining whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to zero.

  The winning number counter 203j is a first specific winning port (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning port (second) of the second variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the 650a. Specifically, one ball is added and updated based on detection of a ball entry by a winning sensor (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes received in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (value of the winning number counter 203j). ) And the discharged number (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are determined to be equal to each other, and then the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to zero.

  Note that, as described above, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, only the first specific prize opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Therefore, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, only the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. Therefore, in the twelfth round, the winning number counter 203j substantially has the second specific prize opening (second The number of balls that have entered the 650a is counted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, a winning is achieved. It is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, but it is entered at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, respectively. A separate counter may be provided for counting the number of spheres.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) an elapsed time since the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d is set in an open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the passage time after the passage solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set in a state where the ball can enter the probability variation ball opening 654 is counted (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In this pachinko machine 10, when eleven rounds of the big hit are completed, the flow path switching valve 650d is rotated clockwise around the switching shaft 650e by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611, The guide channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds, that is, an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round is set. On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is set to OFF. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even when the power is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open in one round. Indicates that the closed state is set. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203n described later is added and updated by 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is used when the first specific round (first large opening) 65a is closed (1 to 11 rounds, 13 to 15 rounds) when the preset one round ends or the second round When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game balls flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. It is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game ball won in the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, it corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) plus a 1 second margin. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1-11 rounds and 13-15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650 is reached. It is determined whether the number of winnings in (12 rounds) matches the number of discharged items (S1507 in FIG. 39). If it is determined that the winning number and the discharging number do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that a ball clogging has occurred in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable prize winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the big jackpot so that the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654. Cheating can be suppressed.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting is made even if the ball enters the probability changing entrance 654. The flag 203h may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the first specific prize opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When detected, the counter value update by the remaining ball timer 203n is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 after the passage solenoid 611 is set to OFF. It is. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the sphere that has flowed into the guide channel 652 (see FIG. 15B) is based on the fact that the channel solenoid 611 is turned on. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. In other words, it indicates that the entrance into the probability variation entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow variation solenoid 611 is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally entering the probability variation entrance 654. In the present embodiment, the time required for a sphere that has flowed into the guide channel 652 to enter the probability variation entrance 654 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds with a margin of 0.2 seconds added. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 after the elapse of 1.2 seconds, it is highly likely that some fraudulent act has been performed, and therefore the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. .

  Thereby, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the guide flow path 652 (a state where the sphere is not guided to the probability variation entrance ball port 654), the ball enters the probability variation entrance ball port 654, or the probability variation ball enters. From the downstream of the entrance 654, damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up the game ball with a piano wire or the like and passing it through the probability variation entrance aperture 654, or erroneously detecting that a ball has entered the probability variation entrance aperture 654 by radio waves, etc. Can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of the ball. The discharge number counter 203q is incremented by 1 each time a ball discharge is detected by the ball discharge port switch (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharges, the value of the discharge number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The short / medium time counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining short time period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the short time state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in this embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not set after the big hit game, the time-short state of 100 normal symbols is given.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (completely out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  Further, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. A probability variation state flag 223f, a time reduction state counter 223g, a big hit medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The probability variation state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a certain symbol certain variation state. If this probability variation state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. The probability variation state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). In accordance with the state of the probability variation state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) displayed in the probability variation state of the special symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or whether or not to display.

  The time-short state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time-short state of a normal symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time short state, and if it is off, it indicates that the normal symbol is in a normal state (low probability state). At this time, the short state counter 223g is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current state is the short state of the normal symbol, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) that is displayed in a short time state of a normal symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or whether or not to display.

  The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (a jackpot state). If this big hit flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state (hit state), and if it is off, a state other than the special gaming state (hit state) (special symbol probability change state, normal Indicates that the symbol is in the short time state or the normal state). The jackpot flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when a special game state (a big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag 223h is set to OFF when an ending command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). In other words, when the special gaming state (big hit state) ends, it is set to off. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the big hit flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or a left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A). Whether or not to display (see) is determined.

  The permissible time counter 223i enters the entrance channel 606 or the ball that has flowed into the induction channel 607 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 607a to any entrance (general winning port 601 or general winning port 602). And a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball throwing time). By counting the ball throwing period, when a ball enters the general winning port 601 or the general winning port 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the ball is operating normally. be able to. The allowable time counter 233i is set to a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Further, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is decremented by 1 (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general prize opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or enters the general prize opening 601 with the storage valve 607a opened. When a sphere enters, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning port 602 after the storage valve 607a is switched to the closed state. There is a case. Similarly, when a ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general prize opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. There is a case to sphere. In order to handle these as normal balls (no warning image is displayed), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the permissible time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value elapses, it is determined that the ball is operating normally when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602 (no warning image is displayed). It is configured as follows.

  The number-of-wins counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 in the big hit. The value of the winning number counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is set to 1 every time a winning information command corresponding to the winning in the general winning slot (large value winning slot) 602 is received in the jackpot. They are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big win state) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 6A). The number-of-wins counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of balls that are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source last address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing, and a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to the image controller 237 from the MPU 231. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored as a back image in the back image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on and that the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special gaming state (big hit state) is to be notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered from “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 59B). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 50B). )), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 24) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 24, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 50B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. When the jackpot is B, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning opening release scenario is set (S217), and then a jackpot start is set (S218). Note that the opening scenario specifically indicates setting of opening patterns of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, the first specific winning opening (first first opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won). In the 12th round, it is set that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened with a pattern according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 16). When the process of S218 ends, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of place (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour / middle counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the high probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share a common determination value. However, depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. A different random value may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and can suppress the big hit bias.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same determination value is set for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery The number of judgment values that are big hits may be varied. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first per-random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “200” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode for jackpot time indicating the jackpot is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits) It is determined what kind of jackpot type is A, jackpot B).

  In the processing of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  Examples of the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d include “displacement (for a long time)”, “disengagement (for a short time)”, “displacement normal reach”, "Outgoing Super Reach" and "Outgoing Special Reach" are defined. In addition, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined as variation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and “special reach” variations are provided as variation patterns for jackpot B. As a variation pattern of common and hit / miss common, “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “common special reach” are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 34). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, various random number counters are acquired and a process for holding the value is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4. If not less (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. Each process of S407 to S412 is different in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. Moreover, when each process of S407-S412 is complete | finished, a prefetch process is performed (S413) and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, referring to FIG. 29, the prefetch process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). This prefetch process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new prize (S501: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the variation is a special symbol probability changing state. If it is determined (S502) and the probability of the special symbol is changed (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per-random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a special symbol probability changing state (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first per-random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display showing the hit and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state (S608), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state (S608: Yes), the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state). That is, if it becomes easy to hit the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the right-handed ball to enter the second entrance 640, and therefore, to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. And it becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), it is configured so that the probability of winning the normal symbol is not increased, and the ball can easily reach the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. Yes.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614). Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when hitting the normal symbol, as in the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second entrance 640 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol win when the second symbol display device starts the variation display being executed. Determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the sphere has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol is displayed. The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S705), and the process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S911) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the storage valve 607a is closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state when the power is restored is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and whether or not the normal symbol is in a short-time state. A status command is generated according to the value of the hour / middle counter 203r and the state of the probability variation flag 203g and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this status command, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the gaming state. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a low probability state, a right-handed navigator (see FIG. 5A) is displayed, or conversely, even though the special symbol is in a probabilistic state, the player It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when right-handed. That is, the gaming state can be matched with the effect to be executed.

  When the process of S914 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S915). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, The jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning port (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 Processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state, And set closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is completed, The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). Display (lights up).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30) ( (Lights up).

  Next, a winning information command setting process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning information is executed based on the stored winning detection information (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a malfunction in the storage valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (such as left-handed during a big hit state or left-handed in a special symbol probable state).

  When the process of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed, or the first specific prize is awarded. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) S218 or S220 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1102 ends, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this processing ends. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, a ball that has entered the storage device 600 can flow down the guide channel 607, so that a large number of awarded balls (15) are provided. A sphere can be entered into 602 (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are provided in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, in order to win a prize ball, the player aims at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big win state), in addition to the winning ball based on the ball entering the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, the general winning provided in the storage device 600 The player can be awarded a prize ball based on the entry to the mouth (large value prize winning opening) 602. Therefore, since the number of winning balls that can be acquired from the start to the end of the jackpot can be increased, it is possible to make the player enjoy playing the game with a big win. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a special symbol probability change state or a normal symbol time-short state is given after the end of the jackpot. As described above, in these states, since it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, the player tries to enter the second entrance 640 by hitting the right side. Do (try to receive a special symbol 2 lottery). Thereby, in many cases, a sphere can be flowed into the storage device 600 before the next jackpot is started. In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set in a closed state, so that the ball is stored above the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit is made and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. That is, immediately after the jackpot is started, the player can acquire a large number (15) of prize balls. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot is won but the number of possessed balls is exhausted, it is possible to secure the possession balls for playing the jackpot game without newly requesting lending of the balls.

  If the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing in S1104 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation for setting the operations of the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. A setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the 12th round of the jackpot is newly started (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the game is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a corresponding to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Thus, in the case of jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is executed. Next, an opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the guide channel 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the process of S1203 is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? It is determined (S1107). If it is determined that it is the operation timing in the processing of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the completion of 15 rounds, which is the final round of the jackpot, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the sphere that has flowed into the interior of the lamp has elapsed, the start timing of the ending effect is determined. If it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and this process ends.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1301 is completed, the storage valve 607a set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), even if a ball is caused to flow into the storage device 600, the storage valve 607a prevents the ball from entering the general winning port (large value winning port) 602. The ball cannot flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), the fundamental game method that increases the number of balls by only paying out the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 by always aiming at the storage device 600 is fundamental. Therefore, in a state other than the special game state (a jackpot state), it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a jackpot by drawing a special symbol.

  As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if the right hand is executed in the normal state, it is difficult for the special symbol lottery to be performed, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in a normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming to win a big game by drawing a special symbol.

  In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big win state), a part of the right-handed ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the short-time state (that is, in the state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided on the right path of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding can be further increased by making a right strike. Can be made. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol is in a probable change state and the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the player has shifted to an advantageous state, the number of possession balls is steadily decreasing, and it is in an advantageous state. It can be prevented (suppressed) that the player can no longer feel it. Therefore, the game can be continued without any reduction in the number of balls in the probability change state of the special symbol or the short time state of the normal symbol.

  Note that the number of prize balls for entering the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, one prize ball may be used). Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent the payout from being excessively increased and the number of possessed balls from being excessively increased in the special symbol probable state or the normal symbol time-short state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. Further, the merit of making a right strike can be further reduced in a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol (that is, a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entrance 640).

  When the processing of S1302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that a ball has been entered, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). Thereby, it shifts to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability variation state of the special symbol has been set is set (S1306), and this processing ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1303 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball has not entered the probability variation entrance 654 in the big round 12 rounds. In order to set the short time period of the normal symbol 100 times after the end of the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the short time medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time reduction state has been set is set (S1308), and this process is terminated. The status command set in the processing of S1306 or S1308 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entrance 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the ball can enter the probability variation entrance 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), a special symbol probability variation state will be given after the jackpot ends, so during the special game state (the jackpot It is possible to give an interest to whether or not the ball enters the probability changing entrance 654 during the state.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the ball is entered (winning) or the probability change is made to the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. A winning process for monitoring the entrance (winning) of the ball into the entrance 654 is executed (S1111). Now, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), it is first determined whether or not it is a period in which a round game is set (round effective period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the opening of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is set to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a ( S1402). If it is determined in the process of S1402 that a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). The process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that no ball has entered any of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404. And migrate.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the winning port that is set to the open state of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a is closed. Is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that it is during the ball throwing time for discharging the ball remaining in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. it can.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 in the present embodiment) that is a period until each big hit round ends. It is determined whether or not (second) has elapsed (S1405). In the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the probability variation entrance 654 (whether or not a probability variation switch (not shown) has been passed) (S1410). ). If it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), The process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere has not passed the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1413: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the guide flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to be off (S1414), and the probability change is valid. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this process ends. Since the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON by the processing of S1415, the sphere remaining in the guidance channel 652 is switched to the probability variation switch even after the channel switching valve 650d is switched and the guidance channel 652 is closed. Can be controlled so that the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). If it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is an upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1418). The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability variation switch is detected, control is performed so that the value of the probability variation setting flag 203h is not updated. As described above, when the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit value and the passage of the probability variation switch is detected thereafter, there is a high possibility that the detection is due to some fraud. Therefore, the probability variation setting flag 203h is prohibited from being updated by turning off the probability variation valid flag 203o to suppress fraud.

  When the processing of S1419 ends, the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is then reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch, so that the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time during which it is determined that the passage of the probability variation switch is valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state of the special symbol from being imparted by illegally passing the sphere through the probability variation switch.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality that has occurred during the special gaming state (big win state) is then executed (S1112), and this process is terminated. Here, details of the abnormality process (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality process (S1112).

  In the abnormal process (S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501), and when it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is determined. It discriminate | determines (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s and updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being thrown away, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball throwing time. To update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a was set). If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1505 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) and Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning (value of winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1507 that the number of balls discharged and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls discharged and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is set, and an error signal output is set to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of illegally leaving the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and passing the ball through the probability variation switch.

  In the processing of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1511), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passing status of the balls to various winning holes (ball holes).

  In the winning information command setting process, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is new winning detection information (whether there has been a new winning for any of the entrances) (S1602). This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that new winning detection information exists (S1602: Yes), the winning entrance (winning entrance) in which the winning (winning) is detected according to the new winning detection information. The winning information command including the information is set (S1603). The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning port, out port, and the like are associated with each bit of 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning entrance (entrance entrance) that detected the entrance (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning entrance (entrance entrance) where the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the process of S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and this process ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a problem in the knowledge storage device 600, whether the player is playing an irregular game, or the like, according to the winning information command. If a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, an error is notified in the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), it executes a power-off process in S1816. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1816 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1816 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1816, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1816 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1708. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1708 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1708 is performed via the processes of S1704 to S1706. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g are updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the main processing is performed. Transition. By updating the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1709 is that when the process from S1704 to S1706 is reached via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes in S1802 to S1810. In S1801, the process of determining whether 1 msec has passed or not is mainly a process related to display (production) in S1802 to S1810, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1811 and the variation display setting process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later are set (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a waiting-for-customer effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1811). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, a variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1815), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1816). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1811). This command determination processing (S1811) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol), or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In the process of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that a pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1909). When the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability variation status flag 203f and the short time status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and this processing is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that no status command has been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1911). If a winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning ball is normal based on the winning information command. If there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud, an error is notified. Error notification processing is executed (S1912), and this processing is terminated.

  on the other hand. If it is determined in S 1911 that a winning information command has not been received (S 1911: No), then it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S 1913). If an opening command has been received (S 1913). (S1913: Yes), the jackpot flag 223h is set to ON, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, a display opening command is set (S1915), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received by the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the big hit flag 223h is set to OFF and the value of the allowable time counter 223i is a counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second. Is set (S1917), a display ending command is set (S1918), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1919). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification processing (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931). If it is on (S1931: Yes), the winning information notified by the received winning information command is included. Whether or not winning information for the first entrance 64 is included is determined (S1932). When it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), as a result of the player left-handing despite the big hit, the first entrance 64 is obtained. Means that a ball has entered. That is, the player performs a game method (how to hit) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a regardless of the special game state (big win state). Means that the person is losing. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set to allow the player to acquire a prize ball in the special game state (big win state) (S1933), and the process To S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. The display control device 114 displays the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display rear image change command. This left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can prompt the player who is left-handed in the special gaming state (big hit state) to make a right-handed strike. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing and win the winning ball more reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1932 that the winning information corresponding to the first entrance 64 is not included in the winning information command (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped. To S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). If the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. If it is, the hit notification process for performing the notification is executed (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball removal period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since this means that it has not elapsed, the processing of S1935 is skipped and this processing is terminated. That is, if a ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guide channel 606 just before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 during the ball throwing period, there is a problem. It is prevented that it is judged.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1931, if it is determined that the big hit flag 223h is not on (is off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S1936: Yes), a notification is given when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal operation (either the special symbol probability change state, the normal symbol time-short state, or the normal state). The normal time notification process for performing the process is executed (S1937), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is removed after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the jackpot. Since this means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped, and this process ends. That is, when a ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guide channel 607 just before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 during the ball throwing period, a problem occurs. It is prevented that it is judged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit notification process (S1935) for performing notification when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit notification process (S1935).

  In the winning notification process (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to have been received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) is used to enter the general winning entry (small value winning entry) 601. It is determined whether or not corresponding winning information is included (S1941). And if the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the big hit that the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state Regardless, this means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guide channel 606. That is, the storage valve 607a is not opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a and the state where the sphere is stored with respect to the upper part of the storage valve 607a is continued. There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that there is a malfunction in the storage valve 607a in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command. Is displayed.

  Note that the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 606 may enter the out port 603a provided on the left side of the general winning port 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball enters the out port 603a. The corresponding winning information is not subject to determination as to whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because only a small percentage of the spheres that flow into the guide channel 606 flow down to the out port 603a, and most of the spheres enter the general winning port (small value winning port) 601. This is because a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, so that it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred by monitoring the general winning award (small value winning award) 601. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the player has entered the out opening 603a. The processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S1941 that the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), the received winning information command is It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning entry (high value winning entry) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the winning entry to the general winning entry (high value winning entry) 602 is determined. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, a display rear image change command is set in order to update the jackpot image in accordance with the value of the updated winning number counter 233j (S1945).

  The display rear image change command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the display content of the winning number display area MA is updated in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. More specifically, after the image in which the number of times of entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (the number of EXTRA BONUS) shown in FIG. An image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of subsequent balls is displayed. By displaying the number of times of winning with respect to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning count display area MA, the winning in the first specific winning slot 65a and the second specific winning slot 650a Allows the player to recognize the number of times he has won a prize ball. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of an increase in the number of times of entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The present embodiment is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the out port 603a is included in the winning information command. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a in a normal time (any of a special symbol probability changing state, a normal symbol time-short state, and a normal state) The normal notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), it is first determined whether or not the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951). If it is determined that the probability variation state flag 223f is not on (S1951), the current state is not the probability variation state of the special symbol (S1951). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-short state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), the current state is neither the probability change state of the special symbol nor the time reduction state of the normal symbol (normal state). means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is making a right turn and whether or not the operation of the storage valve 607a has a problem, first, the received winning information command includes a general winning mouth (high value) It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning entry 602 is included (S1953). If it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (hit state). Is flowing downstream from the position that should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has entered the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by an unauthorized method. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that there is a malfunction in the storage valve 607a in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command. Is displayed.

  In addition, the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 607 in a state where the storage valve 607a is left open due to a malfunction causes the outlets 603b disposed on the left and right sides of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. , 603c may also be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out-ports 603b, 603c is not subject to determination as to whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because only a small percentage of the spheres that flow into the guide channel 607 flow down to the outlets 603b and 603c, and most of them enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. This is because, if the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is monitored, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a failure has occurred. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the player has entered the out openings 603b and 603c. As a result, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955). If it is determined that the winning information is not included, this processing is terminated. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), it is normal (the probability change state of the special symbol, This means that the player is making a right turn in spite of the short time and normal state of the normal symbol). That is, it means that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the player is playing a game by a game method with few opportunities to receive a special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this case, by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts the player to aim at the first entrance 64 by left-handing, the game is displayed. It is possible to prevent a person from losing and receive a special symbol 1 lottery.

  When it is determined in the process of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is greater than 0 in the process of S1952 (S1952: Yes). It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). If it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning at the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1957 that winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big win state). Nevertheless, it means that the sphere is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the player has illegally entered the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the state where the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that there is a malfunction in the storage valve 607a in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command. Is displayed.

  The present embodiment is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included. However, the display error command may be set also when the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the out mouths 603b and 603c is included in the winning information command. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a problem has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1812). This variable display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2004). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so S2007 to S2013. Each process up to is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. The stop type is set (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  When the processing of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time-short state counter 203g is greater than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time-short state counter 203g (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-short state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012). If it is determined that it is 0 (S2012), the normal state of the normal symbol (low level) is changed from the short-time state of the normal symbol. (Probability state), the back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time reduction state of the normal symbol continues, and therefore the rear surface corresponding to the time reduction state of the normal symbol There is no need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  Note that the rear image displayed during the time-saving state is specifically a rear image on which right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the rear face type in which right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the jackpot type. Then, when the short time state of the normal symbol is finished, it is switched to the back image for the normal state in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol is in a probable change state after the big hit, the special symbol probable state continues until the next big hit, so the right-handed navigation is not changed from the back type.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2014). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1. The subtraction is updated (S2015), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and this process is terminated. By the processing in S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

  In the present embodiment, the back face type set for the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol is common, but different back face types may be displayed. Thereby, a wide variety of effects can be realized. Further, the remaining short time period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the short time state counter 203g. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the remaining short time period.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable time counter 223h is updated in the variation display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to update in processing (sound editing / output processing, liquid crystal effect execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the allowable time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. The processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2202.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2103, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the simple command determination process (FIG. 50 (b) (see S2408) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 24) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S2402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2503).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2601, for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601. Then, the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2602. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2604, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2504 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2507), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2703), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is described. In the task process (S2404) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2703, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2702.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2506 (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is a command opening command (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2802. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. After the display round number command is received, the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2508 that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S2510). If there is a round number command for use (S2510: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2511), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53B, details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512). If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2513), and the processing returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2512 that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514). If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types The determination flag is set to OFF (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the task processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102. The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (A resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and an address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2514 that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2516). If (S2516: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the error command process (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2518), and the processing returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2501 to S2518 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed to execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3503), and if it is a demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), this process is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3306 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. The setting is made (S3310), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, the stop pattern of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop pattern determination flag set by the process of S3315. Then, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S3317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table that defines the display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3601, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3804), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  In the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the process of S3805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the head address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. A head address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the above-described drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of the sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning ports (the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a) that are opened in the special game state (big win state). ) And one of the winning openings is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning holes is configured as a winning hole from which a large number (15) of winning balls are paid out when a ball enters. In addition, two types of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a and second specific winning port 650a) are both provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to enter the ball regardless of which winning opening is opened only by striking the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state (big win state) can be made less affected by the skill of the player, so that the game can be enjoyed with peace of mind even if the player is a beginner.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning ports (the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a) among the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13 are provided. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning holes is provided on the upstream side. The storage device 600 is configured such that, when a player makes a right strike, a part of the ball that has been launched can flow into the inside, and the ball that has flowed into the different winning opening A plurality of flow paths for flowing down are provided. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guide channel 606 for flowing the balls down to the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls (three prize balls). A guide channel 607 is provided for allowing the ball to flow down to a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a large number (15 winning balls). Since the number of prize balls that can be acquired can be varied according to the type of the guide channel that flows down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the channel of the channel that the ball flows down to the player The type can be observed interestingly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a storage capable of closing the guide channel 607 for allowing a ball to flow down to a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is 15). A valve 607 a is provided in the guide channel 607. The storage valve 607a is set to an open state during a special gaming state (during a big hit state), and is set to a closed state during other gaming states. In addition, each guide channel is arranged so that the game ball that has flowed into the storage device 600 basically flows into the guide channel 607 more easily than the guide channel 606 (FIG. 9 ( b)). Therefore, in a special game state (a big hit state), in addition to being able to acquire a winning ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, it is provided downstream of the guide channel 607. A winning ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a, and the player only makes a right strike to the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, This is because a sphere can be entered into both the storage device 600 and the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special gaming state (a jackpot state) can be increased, so that the player's merit due to the jackpot can be enhanced. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player play the game more happily to be a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the winning game is won, and when the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened, There is one that gives a large amount of prize balls based on the ball entering (for example, JP 2001-129177 A). In this conventional gaming machine, there are a plurality of winning holes in addition to a specific winning opening. By adjoining a specific winning opening and another winning opening, a specific winning opening is provided. There is a structure in which a ball that is aimed at can enter a specific winning opening and another winning opening. Here, it is common to control the closing of a specific winning opening with a specific number of balls entering a specific winning opening, so the number of winning balls for a specific winning opening The number of prize balls that a player can win increases as the ball enters the other prize opening before the number reaches the specific number. Therefore, by making a specific winning opening and another winning opening adjacent to each other, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls in the winning, so that the player's sense of expectation for winning can be further improved.

  However, in a conventional game machine, there is a case in which an irregular gaming method of acquiring a prize ball by hitting a ball aiming at another prize opening adjacent to a specific prize opening is performed even in a state other than the winning state. It was.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the guide channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, since one sphere can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide flow path 607, the storage device 600 is first used after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the interior of the reservoir is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the sphere flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the flow direction changes by colliding with the stored sphere, so that the sphere moves to the guide channel 602. It is easy to flow down (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, even if a ball is entered into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (a big win state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few winning balls. Therefore, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Accordingly, by always aiming at the storage device 600 even in a state other than the special game state, the irregular game method for increasing the number of balls by only paying out the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 is not fundamentally realized. In a state other than the gaming state (a jackpot state), it is possible to play a game with the expectation that it will be a jackpot by drawing a special symbol.

  Note that the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601 is three. In other words, even if a right-handed game is executed in a game state other than the special game state (a big win state), it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and the payout based on the entry to the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 is made. It is not possible to increase the sphere. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in a normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming to win a big game by drawing a special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding channel 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning port) 601, and the sphere that has flowed down the guiding channel 607 enters the general winning port 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means provided with a plurality of winning holes is provided on the downstream side of each guiding channel, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning holes to be entered. Also good. Thereby, even if it flows down the guide flow path 606, many prize balls can be acquired by making it enter into a winning opening with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until a ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning holes. Therefore, when a ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the guide channel 607 is blocked by the storage valve 607a so that a sphere can be stored in the guide channel 607. You may comprise so that a ball | bowl may be stored in the middle of 607. FIG. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide channel 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). By comprising in this way, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. In this case, the width of the guide channel 607 is increased (for example, the configuration in which the branching member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted in FIG. 8), and the guide channel 605 of the guide channel 607 is removed. An electromagnet may be embedded only in a portion immediately below, and a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided immediately below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere that has been attracted by the electromagnet and stopped flowing down, the stopped sphere contacts the electromagnet portion and the other sphere changes to change the flow-down direction, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. It may be configured such that the portion flows down and flows down in a direction different from the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. And you may arrange | position the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 below the part which the electromagnet is not embedded among the induction | guidance | derivation flow paths 607. FIG. Thereby, since the branch member 604 can be abolished, the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, one sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which two or more spheres can be stored. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or arranged so as to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but is not limited thereto. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide channel 607, and the ball may not flow into the guide channel 607 when the storage valve 607a is closed. By adopting a configuration in which the ball is not stored, the ball can be discharged without remaining in the storage device 600 even if the player hits the right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened in a high-probability state of a special symbol given after the end of jackpot or in a short-time state of a normal symbol. In addition, the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640) is compared to the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the start winning to the first entrance 64). It is easy to become a big hit B that is advantageous to the user. Therefore, when the jackpot ends, the player strikes the ball to strike the second entrance 640 by hitting right. Therefore, for example, when the short time period of the normal symbol is ended, the storage device 600 is in a state where the sphere is stored with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been lost. On the other hand, the storage valve 607a is provided at the upper end of the guide channel 607 so that the ball is not stored in the storage device 600, so that the player can feel that the ball has been used up without waste. . Therefore, satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, you may comprise so that the 2nd entrance 640 may be arrange | positioned in the position in which the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 is moved into the storage device 600. May be. Further, in this case, as a condition for opening the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is opened when a lottery of a special symbol is executed 1000 times without a big hit after the big hit ends. May be.

  As a result, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times after the jackpot is over, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 by making a right strike. The lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 is configured to be 5. However, in the case of this modification, 3 payouts are provided. It may be configured so that. That is, the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when hitting right is one in three, so by making a right stroke after the storage valve 607a is opened, It is possible to enter the second entrance 640 at a rate of 1 in 3 balls. That is, the special symbol 2 can be drawn while maintaining the ball. By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery is repeated without a big hit (even if a so-called large humor occurs), the game is expected to open the storage valve 607a. Can be performed. Therefore, even if the period when the jackpot is not long, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. In addition, by increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 (for example, 10), the ball can be formed by just hitting right after the storage valve 607a is opened. You may comprise so that it may increase. By comprising in this way, the merit at the time of having remove | deviated 1000 times or more continuously to the special symbol lottery can be enlarged more. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it is hoped that the number of lotteries with a small special symbol will be a big win again, and if you continue to lose the special symbol lottery, you will continue to lose the special symbol lottery more than 1000 times in a row. I can make you wish. Furthermore, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls increases only by making a right stroke, so by continuing to deviate from the special symbol lottery, the ball can be removed by paying out the ball to the second entrance 640. It can be hoped that the state of increasing will continue for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of lotteries for special symbols, you can make a wish to win a special symbol, or you can continue to be out of the lottery of special symbols. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, in the storage device 600, only one storage valve 604a is provided, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide channel 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and a storage valve that is opened only during a special game state (during a big hit state) may be provided in one channel. That is, a configuration similar to that of the guide channels 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide channel 606. A general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and a small number of prize balls is provided on the flow path without the storage valve (for example, 3) A general winning opening may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special game state (a big hit state) is started, and each storage valve is opened to store the ball. The balls that have been made can be made to flow down to a general winning opening with a large number of award balls (for example, 15 balls) all at once. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Even when configured in this manner, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot can be increased as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves.

  In the present embodiment, in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, and the first variable prize device is downstream of the storage device 600. 65, and the second variable prize-winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable prize-winning device 65. However, the present invention is not limited to this arrangement, and any arrangement may be adopted. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (big win state), the ball that was launched to enter the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650 is the second inlet. Although it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. By arranging it on the upstream side, award balls can be obtained more smoothly during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  Further, by disposing the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a on the upstream side, by disposing the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a on the upstream side, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) that a ball enters only 600 and that it is difficult for the ball to reach the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a. Therefore, each round in the special gaming state (during the big hit state) can be progressed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second specific entrance 640 are provided as entrances serving as lottery opportunities for special symbols, but either one may be abolished. For example, it is good also as a structure which abolishes the 2nd entrance 640 and provides the electrically-driven accessory 640 with respect to the 1st entrance 64. FIG. This reduces the merit of launching the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state). It is possible to prevent (suppress) a certain game method more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, when a ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters a ball) in a special game state (a big win state), the player enters a general winning port (large value winning port) 602 with a lot of paid out balls. In addition to this, in addition to this, the number of balls that have entered the general entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one special game state (big hit state). You may comprise. As a result, in the special gaming state (big win state), in addition to winning a prize ball by winning the first specific prize opening 65a and the second specific prize opening 650a, how much extra prize balls are obtained. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not Therefore, it is possible to make it seem that more balls are to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, so that it is possible to have a target for the number of balls to be entered. It should be noted that the number of prizes received in the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 is not necessarily displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be provided separately. Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the effect in a big hit state can be performed in a wider display area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the first specific winning port 65a and the ball entering (winning) into the second specific winning port 650a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 is the same number (15). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is passed to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured so as to be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning (winning) (for example, 10). As a result, even if the balls flow into the storage device 600 as a result of the deviation of the traveling direction of the balls in the special game state (big hit state), it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the hole.

  Contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 is determined as the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening. You may comprise so that it may become more than the number of prize balls paid out based on a ball | bowl entering (winning) a winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is 10, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) 602 may be 15. Thereby, since the profit which a player can enjoy by making a ball flow into storage device 600 in a special game state (a big hit state) can be increased, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in a big hit game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot, but the trigger for opening and closing the storage valve 607a. Is not limited to this. You may set so that it may be open | released only for a period shorter than this embodiment, and you may comprise so that an open state and a closed state may be repeated several times in jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between jackpot rounds, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period during which the storage valve 607a is set to the opened state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls to be paid out in one big hit from being excessively increased. That is, since it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit, it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the interval period (that is, the state where the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that reaches the downstream of the path (flow path) can be caused to flow into the storage device 600. That is, a winning ball can be acquired by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 even in the interval period. Therefore, the sphere can be hardly wasted even in the interval period.

  In this embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. As a result, a part of the sphere remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect can be caused to flow into the storage device 600. That is, a winning ball can be acquired by entering the ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Furthermore, the storage valve 607a is left open until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the ending effect ends, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. You may comprise so that it may switch to a state. Thereby, a part of the sphere remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect can be caused to flow into the storage device 600. That is, a winning ball can be acquired by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to be wasted after the end of the ending effect.

  In addition, when the game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, the storage valve 607a is opened, and the storage valve 607a is changed from the set game state to another game state. May be closed. For example, you may comprise so that the storage valve 607a may be open | released in the period when the probability change state of a special symbol is set. As a result, in the probable state of the special symbol, the ball is drawn to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to become a big hit B by making a right strike Can be entered. Therefore, the probability change state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Moreover, you may comprise so that the storage valve 607a may be open | released when the short time state of a normal symbol is set. Basically, the normal symbol time-short state is a state in which the player has less merit than the special symbol probability variation state. However, the storage valve 607a can be configured to open during the normal symbol time-short state. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the normal symbol becomes short.

  Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a is switched at any timing of the player. You may comprise so that a state can be switched. Thereby, it is possible to cause each player to play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her preference.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port from which a prize ball is paid out may be provided instead of the out port. Also, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball into each prize opening may be varied. More specifically, for example, instead of the out port 603a, the prize ball has six winning ports, the prize ball has ten winning ports instead of the out port 603b, and the winning ball instead of the out port 603c. May have 12 winning openings. Thereby, it is possible to observe more interestingly when the sphere flows down the guide channel 606 or in which winning opening the guide channel 607 enters the ball. Further, a member that can change the flow direction of a ball, such as a nail, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 and the guide channel 607 so that a winning opening through which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when a sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to observe the direction of the sphere more interestingly until the sphere enters one of the winning holes. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a entrance where a ball can easily enter by a hall clerk. Therefore, the ball exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to an open state when an opening command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to a closed state when an ending command is received. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute, without delay, the selection process of variation effects, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to an open state (release state) in a special gaming state (a big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to a closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special game state (a big hit state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may switch based on the result of the lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to switch to the open state (released state) once a minute. Also good. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds. Thus, if the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 600 in a state where the lottery is won and the storage valve 607a is set in the open state (released state), the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Since the player can enter the game, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the hope of winning more lotteries. Further, a lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to an open state (release state) may be configured so that a hall clerk or the like can adjust. Thereby, when a player selects one table from which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are to be played, it is possible to predict a table with a good lottery probability and to select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hall, the player's interest can be improved at the stage selection stage before the game is started. .

  In the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot (big hit B) at which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the timing at which it is easy to enter the probability changing ball opening 654 in the twelfth round of the jackpot, and the probability changing ball. There is a jackpot (big hit A) at which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing that makes it difficult to enter the mouth 654, but depending on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, You may comprise so that it may be a jackpot type. For example, in each round of 1 to 11 rounds of jackpot, you may perform the effect that a righteous friend and a monster fight. And if a ally of justice wins by 11 rounds, it may be notified that it is jackpot B, and if a ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is jackpot A. In other words, when a teammate of justice wins, the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to a special symbol probable state. Thereby, it is possible to make the player observe the result of the effect performed in the big hit more interestingly.

  In addition, there is a high possibility that the teammates of justice will have a high expectation of victory (easy to be selected in the case of jackpot B) and the teammates of justice are likely to be defeated (case of jackpot A) Production content) may be provided. For example, if the righteous ally attacks the enemy with a special technique, or if the righteous evade the enemy attack, the expectation to win will be high, the attack of the righteous ally will be lost, You may comprise so that a possibility that a defeat may become high when an enemy attacks with a special technique. Thereby, not only the result of whether or not a righteous ally wins, but also the result can be predicted based on the flow of production until victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  In addition, the content of the production performed by the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production where the righteous ally and the monster fight, but it can suggest an advantageous jackpot B and a jackpot A that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure and can find the treasure by the eleventh round, the jackpot B may be notified, or the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of performing a gluttony and be notified that the jackpot is B when all the provided food has been eaten.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided. Therefore, an effect for explaining the game performance related to the storage device 600 is provided. May be. More specifically, for example, the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, the condition that the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when it is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in a closed state. You may comprise so that the image (descriptive image) which describes may be displayed. Thereby, a player can understand game nature easily. Further, the back surface type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured such that the back surface type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, the player who is used to the game in the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game can change the back type so that the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a right-handed warning image is displayed when a right-hand strike is made in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) and it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600. (See FIG. 5B) is displayed, but it may be configured not to display a right-handed warning image under a predetermined condition. For example, if the player is making a right-hand hit when the ball is not stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. (See) may not be displayed. When the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, a special symbol wins after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set in the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The balls stored in the ball can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Therefore, a ball to be paid out by entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used in the big hit game. Therefore, even if the number of possessed balls is exhausted even if the jackpot is won, the jackpot game can be played without newly borrowing the balls.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is arranged inside the storage device 600 in a special gaming state (big hit state). It is configured such that a winning ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. That is, in the special game state (big win state), in addition to paying out the winning ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, the ball is put into the storage device 600. The prize ball was paid out by entering the ball. Thereby, in the jackpot, it is configured so that more prize balls are paid out, and the interest of the player in the jackpot game is further improved.

  In the first embodiment, in a state other than the special game state (big win state) (normal game state), the upstream of the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the ball Is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 607a. When there is a sphere stored in the storage device 600 in the normal gaming state, the stored sphere can interfere (contact) with another sphere newly flowing into the storage device 600. It was configured as follows. And when interference (contact) with the stored ball | bowl occurs, the flow direction of the ball | bowl newly flowed into the storage apparatus 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning port) 601 with few prize ball numbers. It was comprised so that it might change to (direction of the induction | guidance | derivation flow path 606). Thereby, in the normal gaming state, by aiming to win the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600, the ball is hit to the right, and an irregularity is attempted to increase the holding ball without going through the big hit. The game method was configured not to be fundamentally established.

  On the other hand, in 2nd Embodiment, it replaces with the storage apparatus 600 in 1st Embodiment, and the storage apparatus 700 is provided. And it is comprised so that it can switch by a player's operation whether a ball | bowl is stored with respect to the storage apparatus 700. FIG. Further, when the sphere is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the sphere can flow are provided. , The sphere can flow into either flow path.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a winning opening that makes it easy to enter a ball when the ball is not stored (a state where the storage valve 704a is opened) and two flow paths that easily flow when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. Each of the two types of winning holes provided on the downstream side is configured such that the number of prize balls to be paid out is different. That is, the two types of winning holes that can be won when balls are stored in the storage valve 704a are winning holes with one with a large number of winning balls to be paid out and the other with a small number of winning balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening through which the ball can win in a state where the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be intermediate between the two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state where the number of prize balls can be entered and a place where a small number of prizes can be entered and a state where the average payout can be stably received by flowing the balls into the storage device 700 are switched. Can do. Therefore, according to a player's liking, the game nature at the time of making a ball flow into storage device 700 can be changed, so that an interest in a player's game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first entrance 64, (2) A point that the variable prize winning device 650 is abolished, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and a release button 800 is provided for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to an open state by a player's operation. The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 A point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first entrance 64. And the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 650 provided in the path | route (flow path) of the right side of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment is abolished. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in a special game state (a big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by left-handed.

  In the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails in the vicinity of the entrance is smaller than that in the vicinity of the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment. It is configured to be smaller than 600 (for example, a ratio of one ball to 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a special symbol probable state or a normal symbol time-short state (a period in which the player does not lose even if the player strikes right). FIG. FIG. 63A shows the display content when the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63B shows that the release button 800 is pressed. The display content in a state (a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment (FIG. 5 ( Instead of Ds2) in a), the text “Open the gate when the button is pressed!” is displayed. By displaying this character, the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800 (button) for the player. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as those in the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, the detailed name description is omitted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63B, when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the characters “gate open” are displayed for the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage apparatus 700 is an open state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide channel 707 for flowing down a sphere that has flowed in from the upper portion thereof, and three channels are provided on the downstream side of the guide channel 707. (The downstream of the guide channel 707 is branched in three directions). Specifically, a guide channel 706 for causing the inflowing sphere to flow downward in the front view, a guide channel 704 for causing the inflow sphere to flow down in the front view, and a lower right direction in the front view. And a guide channel 708 for the purpose. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide channel 705, the sphere is on the right or left side while flowing down the guide channel 705. However, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 705 is likely to flow into the guide channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the guide channel 705.

  Downstream of the guide channel 706, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 with a relatively large number of payout balls (for example, six) is provided. Further, downstream of the guide channel 704 is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 with a smaller number of winning balls (for example, three) than the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. Is provided. Furthermore, as other entrances other than the general prize opening (medium value prize opening) 701 and the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 702, there are out holes 703a to 703e in which no prize ball is paid out even if a ball enters. Is provided. The game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 708 enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e, so that the ball flows down the guide channel 708. In addition, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the guide channel 706 but did not enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Is done. In addition, a ball that has flowed down the guide channel 704 but did not enter the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out port 703b or the out port 703c. Is done. These out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from accumulating below the storage device 700 even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration or the like, and reliably discharge the balls. Can do.

  The guide channel 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the guide flow path 704, and stores one sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closing in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be able to release the closed state (set to the open state) by operating the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been. In a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by an impact caused by interference (contact) with the stored sphere. This change (switching) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a trajectory (downward direction) of a sphere when the sphere that has flowed into (entered into) the storage device 700 flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the left in front view due to the impact of the interference.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when a sphere that has flowed into (entered into) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with a sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, The sphere flows into the guide channel 706 and flows down the guide channel 706. Here, since a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guide channel 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the ball that flows into (enters) the storage device 700 repels in the right direction when viewed from the front by interfering with (contacting with) the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, The sphere flows into the guide channel 708 and flows down the guide channel 708. Here, since the outlets (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the ball enters one of the outlets. That is, when the ball repels to the right when viewed from the front, the prize ball is not paid out, so there is no merit for the player.

  Thus, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball that flows into (enters) the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a sphere flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the sphere will repel leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. A game can be performed. That is, since the flow direction (repulsion direction) of the sphere that flows into (enters) the storage device 700 can be confirmed more interestingly, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, the direction in which the ball tends to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry to the storage device 700, and the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, so that the ball is likely to repel the player toward the guide channel 706. It can be devised how to hit. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, when selecting a pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 in which a ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. Can do. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before the game is started, it is possible to give pleasure to search for the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to the user.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 in a state where the storage valve 704a is set to an open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the guide channel 705. Since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the guide channel 705 (see FIG. 66), the sphere is on the right or left side while flowing down the guide channel 705. However, the flow direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 705 flows into the guide channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the guide channel 705.

  In a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere can flow down the guide channel 704. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the guide channel 704 flows down the guide channel 704 to the general winning port (inside Enter the value winning entry 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of winning balls than the winning balls for entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is paid out.

  Thus, in a state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708. That is, instead of being able to enter the ball into the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 702 with a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out holes (small value prize winning holes) 703d and 703e. The prize ball is not lost. Therefore, when a ball enters the storage device 700, a winning ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can have a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, if the storage valve 704a is kept closed, a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to achieve a state (a state in which a large number of prize balls can be acquired, but there is a possibility that prize balls cannot be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to an open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (although a small amount is stable). A state in which a prize ball can be obtained). Therefore, since the player can switch the gameability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player can select the gameability that suits his taste. And can play games.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the specified contents of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. The release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed. It is different in point. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is disposed at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate) the release button 800. When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (pressing detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the pressing has been detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 so as to open the storage valve 704a based on the press detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is set to ON.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, similarly to the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

  In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with each jackpot type only. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the same value for the same first type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery The jackpot type is associated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 49” is defined in association with the big hit C (FIG. 68 (a)). ) 202b1). The jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot C is over, a short time state of a normal symbol is added as an added value (a transition to a low probability state of a special symbol and a short time state of a normal symbol). Moreover, the short time state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

  On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68 (a)). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot D ends, a special symbol probability variation state of a special symbol is given as an added value (transition to a special symbol probability variation state). In addition, the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is determined in advance according to the winning jackpot type. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is adopted. Accordingly, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed.

  Next, the specified contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation valid flag 203o, the probability variation valid timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in this embodiment, the game state set at the end of the jackpot is determined in advance according to the jackpot type, and whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol during the special game state (during the jackpot state) Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. This release flag 203 s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704 a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704 a is released). )). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flow-down time counter 223k are added. Yes.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to an open (released) state. If this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and a sphere can be stored in the upper part thereof. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is set to an open (released) state, and a ball can flow down the guide channel 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main control device 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The sound lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The flow-down time counter 223k is configured such that the ball that has flowed into the guide channel 704, the guide channel 706, or the guide channel 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is one of the entrances (general prize port 701, general prize). It is a counter for counting the time (ball throwing time) until entering the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball throwing period, a general winning entry (medium value winning entry) 701, a general winning entry (high value winning entry) 702, an out opening (small value winning entry) 703d, or an out entry (small value). When a ball enters the winning opening 703e, it can be more accurately determined whether or not the ball is operating normally. The flow-down time counter 233k is set to a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, it is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball enters the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 provided downstream of the storing valve 704a, or the storing valve 704a is opened. If a ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (FIG. 7 ( b) see) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the ball is placed in the general prize opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a is switched to the closed state. There is a case where the player enters a winning entry 701. Similarly, when the ball flows into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state, the ball is generally used after the storage valve 704a is switched to the open state. There are cases where a player enters a winning entrance (high value winning entrance) 702, an out exit (small value winning entrance) 703d, and an out exit (small value winning entrance) 703e. In order to handle these as normal balls (no warning image is displayed), in this embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow-down time counter 233k is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Until one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When entering the out mouth (small value winning opening) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed descriptions of other processes that are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. Similar to the first embodiment, main processing of the game is executed in this main processing.

  In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is substituted for the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35). Is different in that it is executed. Moreover, after the 2nd symbol display update process (S1007) is complete | finished, it is also different also in the point that the storage control process (S1022) for setting opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is performed. Another difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special gaming state (a jackpot state), various effects according to the jackpot are executed, This is a process for opening or closing one specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  Of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021), the processes of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 are S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the above processing is executed. Moreover, in the jackpot control process 2 in this embodiment, the process of S1103 in the first embodiment (a process for setting the opening of the storage valve) is abolished. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether or not it is in the special gaming state (big hit state). This is because of switching.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a Opening is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls is won after opening the ball, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. The process is terminated (S1124). On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special game state (big win state) are completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, an ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probable variation jackpot) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the hour / middle counter 203r (S1127), and this process ends. By setting 100 to the hour / medium counter 203r, it is possible to set the normal symbol hour / short period until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1126 that the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give a probability variation state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends ( S1128), the process ends. If it is not the ending start timing in the process of S1109 (S1109: No), this process ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormal process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) whose state after the jackpot is determined in advance according to the jackpot type.

  Next, a storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1022). This storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting opening and closing of the storage valve 704a as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). If it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (the storage device 700). Next, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not a press detection signal is detected.

  If it is determined in step S4002 that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, a pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a open, This process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), the storage valve 704a is closed to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is set to OFF (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this process is terminated.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the small region Ds2 is set in such a manner that the characters “open the gate when the button is pressed!” Are displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800 for the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which the storage device 700 can store a ball is set). Next, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not a press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a is set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a has been opened. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this process is terminated.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), it is set to a mode in which the characters “gate open” are displayed for the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily that the storage valve 704a is an open state with respect to a player.

  By executing this storage control process, the storage valve 704a can be opened or closed according to the operation state of the release button 800. Accordingly, by storing the ball on the upper portion of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, either the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e It is possible to switch between a state in which the crab ball enters and a state in which the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down toward the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) are partly changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described below, and detailed description of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 are the same as the processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. Each is executed.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process ends.

  Moreover, in the command determination process (refer FIG. 72) in this embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), it is then determined whether or not a storage state command has been received. It is determined (S1922). And when it determines with having received the storage state command (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (reserved state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the stored state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off. When the storage state flag 223k is updated, the rear image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the updated storage state is set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the contents.

  When the process of S1923 ends, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the flow-down time counter 223l (S1924), and this process ends. By using the ball throwing time set for the flow-down time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a malfunction in the storage valve 704a. In addition, in the process of S1922, when it determines with having not received the storage state command (S1922: No), a process transfers to S1919.

  Thus, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the release state command or the closed state command from the main control device 110. It is possible to set a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the command. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, a warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the warning process (S1921) is a process for determining whether or not there is a failure such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and issuing a warning when a failure has occurred.

  In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). If it is on (S4101: Yes), then whether the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S4102). If it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (reserved state) and the ball throwing period has elapsed. Therefore, a storage time notification process for notifying a malfunction in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4103), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S4102: No), it means that the ball is currently being thrown away due to the storage valve 704a being set in the closed state. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the details of the above-described storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is also set to the closed state (reserved state). Regardless, this means that the ball has flowed downstream of the storage valve 704a and has entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. In other words, since it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is closed, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). This process is terminated.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)), the player or the store clerk can easily be aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be resolved quickly.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104), If it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the ball throwing period has elapsed. Therefore, a release time notification process for notifying a malfunction in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4105), and this process is terminated. The cancellation notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release time notification process (S4105). In the cancellation notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the winning entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is output. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entrance to the mouth (small value winning entrance) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entrance to the out entrance (small value winning entrance) 703d, 703e is supported. If the winning information to be included is not included (S4302: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S4302 that winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out-port (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the process of S4303, which is executed when winning information corresponding to the winning ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guide channel 704, so that the general winning port (high value winning port) 702 or out The reason why the balls enter the mouths (small value winning mouths) 703d and 703e is that there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display error command, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7 (b)), the player or the store clerk can easily be aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be resolved quickly.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 700 that can store the sphere therein is provided. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 704, 706, 708) therein, and is configured to allow the spheres to flow down to different entrances. The guide channel 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a that can close the channel. When the guide valve 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one sphere can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

  In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guide channel 704 (compared to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708, into the guide channel 704). Therefore, the ball can enter the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 provided downstream of the guide channel 704. Therefore, by letting the ball flow into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the winning ball based on the winning to the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701.

  On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and a sphere is stored in the upper part thereof, the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere, whereby the guide flow path 706, Or it repels in either direction of the guide channel 708. That is, when the flow direction changes due to repulsion, either of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 with a large number of winning balls to be paid out or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e where no winning balls are paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device that temporarily holds a ball that has been launched into the game board. Among these conventional gaming machines, there is one that can release a held ball to the game board by a player's operation and enter a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction ( For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2003-190443).

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because only the ball released using the holding device is entered into a predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, if the storage valve 704a is kept closed, a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to achieve a state (a state in which a large number of prize balls can be acquired, but there is a possibility that prize balls cannot be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to an open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (although a small amount is stable). A state in which a prize ball can be obtained). Therefore, since the player can switch the gameability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player can select the gameability that suits his taste. And can play games. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Thereby, a game can be started with respect to each player in the period when the storage valve 704a is in the state suitable for one's taste. Moreover, you may comprise so that the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to switch to the open state (released state) once a minute. May be.

  Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. Accordingly, when the nail 709a and 709b are adjusted so that the ball can easily enter the outlets (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e when the storage valve 704a is closed, the balls are stored by lottery. A game can be played in the hope that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if the ball is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball continues to be removed from the lottery. A game can be performed in the hope that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Further, a lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to an open state (release state) may be configured so that a hall clerk or the like can adjust. Thereby, when a player selects one table from which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are to be played, it is possible to predict a table with a good lottery probability and to select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hall, the player's interest can be improved at the stage selection stage before the game is started. .

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of channels, the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708, through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning holes may be provided. Further, more variations may be provided depending on the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters each prize opening. As a result, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of winning balls that can be acquired can be increased, so that the player can more closely observe the flow direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700 Can be made.

  A plurality of flow paths through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is opened may be provided. In addition, a ball entrance may be provided through which a different number of prize balls are paid out when flowing down each flow path. Thus, even when the storage valve 704a is opened, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the flow direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700 with respect to the player Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, the storage device 700 can be configured to easily flow into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning port 65a is provided as a winning port that is opened in the special gaming state (big win state), but a plurality of winning ports may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during a period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during a predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, it is only necessary to operate the release button 800 when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of player operations can be reduced. Contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operation may be provided. Even if comprised in this way, similarly to this embodiment, each player can be made to select the game nature suitable for his own taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters with respect to the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, according to the state of the storage valve 704a, either a live-action image with the storage valve 704a opened or a real-action image with the storage valve 704a closed may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may display on the near side rather than the 3rd pattern. Further, the configuration of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the configuration of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to an open state when a release state command is received from the main controller 110, and may be controlled to be switched to a closed state when a closed state command is received. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute, without delay, the selection process of variation effects, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided, an effect that explains the game performance related to the storage device 700 is provided. May be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) that explains the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a and the merits and demerits when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. You may comprise as follows. Thereby, a player can understand game nature easily. Further, the back surface type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured such that the back surface type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, the player who is used to the game in the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game can change the back type so that the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handed, but this is not limitative. It is not something that can be done. For example, you may provide the 1st specific prize opening 65a downstream of the storage apparatus 700 similarly to 1st Embodiment. As a result, the ball can be caused to flow into the first specific winning port 65a and the storage device 700 simply by making a right strike in the special game state (big win state). Can do more. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when a sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and a sphere newly introduced into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), a flow path through which the newly introduced sphere flows down is provided. It was configured to be random. In other words, in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the proportion of the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is distributed to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708 is substantially the same. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a is widened (for example, 1.5 times as wide as the diameter of the sphere), and the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a is positioned at the right side of the front view or the left side of the front view. You may comprise so that it may obtain. When the sphere is arranged on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a, the sphere that newly flows into the storage device 700 easily collides with the right side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, since the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side when viewed from the front, the sphere can easily flow down the guide channel 708. As described above, since the outlets (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the player cannot acquire a prize ball (which is disadvantageous for the player). . On the other hand, when the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the storage valve 704a on the right side of the front view, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the left side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, since the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left in the front view, the sphere can easily flow down the guide channel 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the player can acquire a relatively large amount of winning balls (advantageous to the player). Becomes). As described above, the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and an unfavorable state for the player. Therefore, the storage valve 704a is closed when the storage valve 704a is closed. It is possible to make the user aware of the arrangement of the spheres stored in the upper part. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is unfavorable (that is, if the spheres are stored on the left side of the front view), the storage valve 704a can be opened (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. it can. Further, if the arrangement of the spheres is advantageous (that is, if the spheres are stored at the right side of the front view), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the spheres. . Therefore, since it is possible to give pleasure to determine whether or not to release the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the first embodiment described above, the state of the second specific prize opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent from each other. In the bonus game state (big win state), the storage valve 607a is always controlled to be in an open state, while the second specific prize winning opening 650a has a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It is configured to be set to the open state only during the open period defined for each jackpot type shown in FIG. In addition, two types of flow paths (guidance flow path 652 and induction flow path 653) are provided in the second variable prize winning device 650, and the guidance is performed only when the ball flows down the guidance flow path 652. The ball was configured to be able to enter a probability variation entrance port 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, the ball does not flow down the guide channel 652 so that it does not shift to a special symbol probable state after the jackpot ends. It was.

  On the other hand, in this modification, it replaces with the member which opens and closes the 2nd specific winning opening 650a of 1st Embodiment, and the storage valve 607a, and uses the 2nd specific winning opening 650a and storage by using the slide member 900. The apparatus 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, it is configured so that the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning port 650a and the opening / closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed with one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. In other words, when the second specific winning port 650a is opened, the guide channel 607 (general winning port 602) is also opened, and when the second specific winning port 650a is closed, the guiding channel 607 (general winning port 602). ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this way, the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port 602 (that is, the winning port opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning ports for obtaining a winning ball during the jackpot. Can be handled as

  In addition, only the guide flow path 652 continuing to the probability variation entrance ball port 654 is provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide channel 653, and the normal entrance port 655 are provided. Has been abolished. In other words, if the ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a, the special symbol is changed to the probable change state after the big hit. In addition, the winning opening opened in the 12th round is changed according to the jackpot type. In other words, in the 12th round, the second specified prize opening 650a and the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 are set to the open state (V route opening jackpot) and the first specified in all rounds of the jackpot The winning port 65a is set to the open state (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) and the jackpot (V route closing jackpot) is provided. It has been.

  Along with these changes from the first embodiment, the end condition of each jackpot is also changed. Specifically, in the 1 to 11 rounds and the 13 to 15 rounds, the balls that have entered the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 When the total number becomes 10, or when 30 seconds have passed since the round was started, the round game is ended (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). Also, in the 12th round, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is 10 in total, or the round When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the round game is finished (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port 602 are closed).

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration in that it is a member for switching the state of the second specific winning port 650a (closing portion 910). The member for changing the state of the guide channel 607 (the ball storage unit 920) is constituted by one member (the slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning port 650a. The number of prize balls to be changed is 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the content of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is the pachinko machine in the first embodiment 0 is a point that has been changed from. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route opening jackpot (hit F) explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when there are 12 rounds of V route open big hit (big hit F), the characters “ROUND12” are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific prize winning opening 650a has been opened is formed at the center upper part of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, characters “CHANCE !!” and characters “Changing route is open!” Are displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a to shift to the special symbol probable state after the end of the jackpot. The other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents (see FIG. 6A) displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, as in the first embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A variable winning device 650 is provided. Also, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 (closing portion 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storage portion 920) Are arranged in a straight line. Although details will be described later, this is because the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

  In addition, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. The hall clerk can adjust the rate at which the balls flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the hall is opened, for example. By changing the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600, the number of balls entering the general winning opening (large value winning port) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot can be changed. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball hit by the right strike is easily flown into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player at the jackpot. Therefore, since the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Conversely, when the nail 921a, 921b is adjusted to make it difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the first specific winning port 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600, and the second It is possible to increase the number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it becomes easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round, when the big hit F is achieved, it is possible to easily shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the possibility that the jackpots will continue in a short period of time increases, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the structure for adjusting the ease of the flow of the ball into the storage device 600 (the ease of the ball entering the second specific winning port 650a) is not limited to the nail. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 described above will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidable to the back side of the front view or the front side of the game board 13, and is slid to the front side of the front view to identify the second specified. The winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be closed. On the other hand, the second specific prize winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be opened by slidably moving the slide member 900 to the back side in the front view with respect to the game board 13.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a view of the game board 13 as viewed from above when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are closed by the slide member 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view of the game board 13 as viewed from above when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing portion 910 and a ball storage portion 920 protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930, respectively. U-shaped ”). The closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are protruded to the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening parts 940a and 940b formed in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

  In a state where the slide member 900 is slid to the front side in front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so that the sphere is changed to the second variable. It becomes impossible to enter the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide channel 607 is closed by the ball storage unit 920, it is possible to cause the ball to enter a general winning opening (large value winning port) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slid to the back side of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened and the guide channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 provided downstream of the guide channel 607 and the second specific winning port 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in the present modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning port 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning port 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processes in the game such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variation time, so when the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The effect on the game will become large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Electrical Configuration of Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the present modification is configured such that when a ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a, the ball always enters the probability variation entrance 654. As the jackpot type, a jackpot where the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot where the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given. In each jackpot round, the first specific winning opening 65a is held for a predetermined time (30 seconds elapses) It is a big hit to be released (until 10 balls have entered). In other words, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot enter the probability variable entrance ball port 654 disposed inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time-short state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit. Granted once.

  On the other hand, a jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with a value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). The jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and the second specific winning slot 650a and the general winning slot (large value winning slot) 602 in the jackpot 12 rounds have a predetermined time (30 seconds elapses). Or until 10 balls have entered, and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a is held for a predetermined time (30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have entered) It is a jackpot to be released (until the ball). In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if the ball can enter the second specific winning slot 650a in the 12th round, the probable state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends Is granted. On the other hand, as a result of the ball entering only the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in spite of not making a right turn in the 12th round or making a right turn, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. When 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, after the jackpot F, the short time state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, it differs in that the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed descriptions of other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

  Of the jackpot control process 3, each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 includes S1101, S1102, and S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. In the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are abolished.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. This jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed.
Further, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in this modification, when it is determined that the round 12 is the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the jackpot type of this time is the jackpot F (V route open) It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S1211).

  If it is determined that the jackpot F is not the jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that the jackpot E is that the first specific winning opening (first jackpot) 65a is opened in all the jackpot rounds. The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1211 that the jackpot is F (S1211: Yes), since the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round, the second specific The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing part 910 that has closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage part 920 that has closed the guide flow path 607 of the lottery apparatus 600. And the closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are slid and displaced in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a by the process of S1203, the guide channel 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general prize opening 602 is also opened). )

  After the opening of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a and the general prize opening (large value winning opening) 602 is set by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set. And a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) is set to notify the audio lamp control device 114 that the guide channel 607 is set to the open state (release state) (S1212). The process proceeds to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display rear image change command is received by the display control device 114, a display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “CHANCE !!” and “Probability route open!”. Are displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has a chance to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol.

  If it shifts to the probable change state of the special symbol, it will become a big hit again in a short period after the big hit is completed, and it will be a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be more seriously aimed at the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from being a simple operation for obtaining a winning ball, and to entertain the game during the special game state (during the jackpot state).

  As described above, of the right-handed balls, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is determined by the nail 921a, 921b ( It can be varied by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a so that it opens to the right when viewed from the front or by adjusting the nail 921b so that it opens to the left when viewed from the front (opening the nail), the right-handed ball flows more into the storage device 600. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ratio of the spheres that reach the second specific prize opening 650a is relatively low. In other words, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the big hit F. In addition, if 10 balls enter the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 without allowing the ball to enter the second specific prize opening 650, the 12th round ends. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the balls easily flow into the storage device 600, it becomes easier for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of winning balls than the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). Thereby, since the player can acquire a lot of prize balls, the interest with respect to the jackpot of the player can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, in the first to eleventh rounds, the player makes a right turn aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the player is arranged downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The sphere also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, one sphere is stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920 before the 12th round starts. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the slide member 900 is slid and the upper part of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storing unit 920 becomes the general winning opening. (Large value winning entry) 602 flows down. As a result, out of the balls that have been right-handed in the 12th round, nine balls have entered the second specific winning opening 650a before entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will be completed.

  On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921a and the nail 921b so as to approach each other (closing the nail), it becomes difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the ratio of the balls that reach the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, it becomes easy to make the ball enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the big hit F. Therefore, it becomes easier to shift to a special symbol probability changing state after the jackpot. Thereby, since it becomes easy to become a big hit again in a short period after the end of the big hit F, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this way, when the right-hand hit is made, by changing the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600, the second entrance 650a provided downstream from the inlet portion of the storage device 600. The ease of entering can be changed. Therefore, the playability in the case of a big hit F can be changed only by the hall clerk adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the gameability that makes it easy to shift to a special symbol probable state, and easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 12 It is easy to win a lot of prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch to a gameability that makes it difficult to shift to a probable state of special symbols. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then a winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the present modification. Of the winning process 2 (S1122), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed.

  Also, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in the present modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning port (first large opening) 65a, the second specific (S1404: Yes) or round time when it is determined that the total number of balls entered into the winning award (second large opening) 650a or the general winning award (large value winning mouth) 602 is 10 or more When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has passed (S1405: Yes), any open winning opening (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or second specific A winning opening closing process for setting closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. This winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). This winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting closing of the winning opening when the closing condition of the winning opening is satisfied in each jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the winning opening currently open is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. 1 large opening) 65a is closed (S4402), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the current round is the twelfth round (S4401), since the winning opening opened according to the jackpot type is different, the current jackpot is a jackpot F (V route It is determined whether or not it is an open big hit (S4403). If it is determined that the jackpot F is not the jackpot F (V-route opening jackpot) (that is, jackpot E (V-route closing jackpot)) (S4403: No), the currently opened winning mouth is the first specific winning mouth ( This means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed by shifting the process to S4402 (S4402). finish.

  In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. This means that the second special prize opening (second large opening) 650a and the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. Mouth) In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the general winning port (large value winning port) 602 has been closed, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state (reserved state) is set ( S4405), the process is terminated.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display rear image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the chance to shift to the special symbol probable state has ended.

  By performing this winning opening closing process (S1431), the opened winning opening can be accurately closed.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 and FIG. 85, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination process is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main controller 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the command determination process in the present modification is configured to execute an error notification process 2 (S1971) instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification process 2 (S1971) described above. Of the error notification process 2 (S1971), in S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same process as the error notification process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 44) is executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in this modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. Instead of referring to), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process ends. This hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for performing notification when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit, similarly to the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. It is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the above-mentioned hit notification process 2 (S1981) will be described. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (reserved state) and the ball throwing period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

  When it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (reserved state). This means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (is off) (S1991: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the flow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). If it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then, the received prize information command is entered into the general prize opening (small value prize opening) 601. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the winning at the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S1996, when the winning information corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). In other words, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball throwing period has elapsed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

  By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be notified promptly, so that the malfunction can be quickly resolved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specific winning port (second large opening) 650a and the guide channel in the storage device 600. The opening / closing operation 607 can be performed simultaneously. That is, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining the winning ball during the big hit.

  Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning port 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized by simply sliding the slide member 900, the second specific winning port 650a can be realized as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared to the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are controlled separately. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processes in the game such as lottery of special symbols and determination of variation time, so when the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The effect on the game will become large. On the other hand, in this modification, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  Further, in this modified example, only the probability variation ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the second variable prize winning device 650 always enters the probability variation ball entrance 654. It is configured to sphere. Thereby, if a ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a, a simple gameability of shifting to a probable state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be realized. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to determine whether or not the state shifts to the special symbol probable state, it is possible to provide a game that even a beginner can enjoy. In addition, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entrance 655 provided in the second variable prize apparatus 650 in the first embodiment are eliminated, the second variable prize apparatus 650 is eliminated. The structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in this modification, the ratio of the sphere that flows into the storage device 600 among the right-handed spheres is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, whether or not to win based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, lottery, whether to shift to the probability variation state separately during the win There is something to draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent a win from being a mere work for obtaining a lot of balls, and to make a hit game with a sense of expectation for shifting to a probability fluctuation state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. I am trying.

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines have a predetermined area in which a game ball can enter only during the hit, and the probability variation state after hitting by entering the game ball into the predetermined area (For example, JP 2003-180999 A).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, the rate at which game balls enter the predetermined area while hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the rate of transition to the probability variation state different, There was no choice but to introduce models with different sides. In other words, with conventional gaming machines, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to the probability variation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly deal with business policies that differ from hall to hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been demanded.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when performing a right strike can be easily changed by adjusting the nail 921a and 921b. It is configured. Thereby, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second entrance 650a provided downstream of the entrance portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, the playability in the case of a big hit F can be changed only by the hall clerk adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the gameability that makes it easy to shift to a special symbol probable state, and the easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is special. It is possible to switch the gameability that is difficult to shift to the symbol probable state. Therefore, since the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, versatility can be improved.

  In the present modification, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second specific prize opening 650a. Therefore, since it becomes easy to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the game. Further, the opening time may be 2 seconds, for example. By shortening the opening time, the pachinko machine 10 in which various ways of hitting are made or the nails 921a and 921b are more closed, in order to make the ball enter the second specific prize opening 650a in a limited time. Can be selected. Therefore, it can be made into heat by the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning port 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be varied by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for changing the ratio of the spheres reaching the second specific prize opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out-out port or a winning port through which a winning ball is paid out by entering a ball may be provided. And you may comprise the 2nd specific prize opening 650a so that an opening-and-closing state may switch with a single member. Even if it comprises in this way, the ratio of the ball | bowl which reaches | attains the 2nd specific winning opening 650a is variable by changing the easiness to enter the out port or winning hole by adjusting the nail 921a, 921b. Can be made. Moreover, since the structure can be simplified by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the ease of inflow into the storage device 600 is not necessarily adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, whether or not the ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F can be disabled on the hall side, so that the ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a. Even if you don't play the ball, you can prevent the discouraged tip from heading to the hall. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust with the hall.

  In the present modification, the second specific prize opening 650a and the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 are opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may open | release in the 1st round. Thereby, since it can be determined at an early stage whether or not to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). Moreover, you may comprise so that the 2nd specific winning opening 650a may be open | released in 15th round. As a result, whether or not to shift to the special symbol probability changing state is not determined until round 15, which is the final round, so that the player's expectation for the special symbol probability changing state can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot game of the player. Further, for example, when the big hit F is achieved, the second specific prize opening 650a and the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened at the 12th and 13th rounds. Thereby, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the eleventh round enter the general winning opening (large value winning port) 602 in the twelfth round, and the ball storing section in the thirteenth round. It is possible to make a state in which no sphere exists at the top of 920. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances for the ball to enter the second specific prize opening 650a.

  In the present modification, as in the first embodiment, it is configured so that only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, you may comprise so that four spheres can be stored in the upper part of the bulb | ball storage part 920. FIG. In this case, the end condition of 12 rounds is changed. For example, when 5 balls have entered a total of 5 balls into the first specific winning port 65a, the second specific winning port 650a, and the general winning port 602, the 12th round ends. You may comprise. In the big hits 1 to 11 rounds, the game is played by trying to enter the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handed, so in many cases, before the start of the 12th round, The upper limit number (4) is stored. In other words, 12 rounds are started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, so that the four stored balls flow into the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 at the same time. In this state, four balls have entered the specific winning opening (the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are completed when another ball enters the second specific prize opening 650a or the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specific prize opening). 650a or a general winning entry (large value winning entry) 602), the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more tense and play a 12-round game. Further, in rounds 1 to 11 of the jackpot, while wishing that the spheres do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of spheres stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920 is not the upper limit of 4 but 12). A jackpot game can be played (in the hope of a round). Therefore, since the game can be performed with a sense of tension even during the jackpot, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from being simply a work for obtaining a prize ball, and the player's jackpot game Can improve interest in

  It should be noted that the number of balls entered into the specific winning opening, which is the condition for finishing 12 rounds, and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play with a stronger wish that the ball is not stored in the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. Conversely, the upper limit number of spheres that can be stored in the sphere storage unit 920 may be reduced. Thereby, even if the upper limit number of balls is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to enter the ball into the second specific winning port 650a in the 12th round is given multiple times. Can do. Therefore, since it can be made easier to shift to a probable state of special symbols, the interest of the player in games can be improved.

  In this modified example, in the 12th round of jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage unit 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not. For example, you may comprise so that it may alert | report whether it is jackpot E or jackpot F by the result of the presentation performed by the eleventh round of jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each round of 1st to 11th rounds, an effect in which a friend of justice and a monster fight may be performed. And if a friend of justice wins by 11 rounds, it may be notified that it is jackpot F, and if a friend of justice is defeated, it may be notified that it is jackpot E. In other words, if the teammate of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the special symbol probable state. Thereby, it is possible to make the player observe the result of the effect performed in the big hit more interestingly.

  In addition, there is a high possibility that the teammates of justice will win (highly expected to be selected in the case of jackpot F) and the teammates of justice will be defeated (in the case of jackpot E). Production content) may be provided. For example, if the righteous ally attacks the enemy with a special technique, or if the righteous evade the enemy attack, the expectation to win will be high, the attack of the righteous ally will be lost, You may comprise so that a possibility that a defeat may become high when an enemy attacks with a special technique. Thereby, not only the result of whether or not a righteous ally wins, but also the result can be predicted based on the flow of production until victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

  In addition, the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-mentioned production where the righteous ally and the monster fight, but can suggest an advantageous jackpot F and a jackpot E that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure and can find the treasure by the eleventh round, it may be configured that the jackpot F is notified, or the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of gluttony and to notify that it is a big hit F when all the provided food is left without being eaten.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 600 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided. Therefore, an effect for explaining the game performance related to the storage device 600 is provided. May be. More specifically, for example, the image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, the condition that the storage valve 607a is opened, the merit when it is opened, and the demerit when the ball is hit right in a closed state. You may comprise so that the image (descriptive image) which describes may be displayed. Thereby, a player can understand game nature easily. Further, the back surface type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured such that the back surface type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, the player who is used to the game in the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game can change the back type so that the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present modification, both the second specific prize opening 650a and the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 are treated as winning holes for obtaining a big winning ball. The winning opening 602 may be handled as a normal winning opening. That is, as a condition for ending each jackpot round, each of the jackpot rounds ends when ten or more balls have entered the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific prize opening 650a (generally, the round ends) The number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 may not be involved). As a result, the player gets more profits as the ball enters the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the balls can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult to enter the balls into the second specific winning port 650a. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so as to make it difficult for the ball to flow in, the ball is configured to easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of shifting to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot can be changed, but the ratio of shifting to the probability change state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of making the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, a probability variation entrance 654 and a normal entrance 655 are provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It is good also as a structure. Then, the hall clerk may be able to adjust the ratio at which the balls that have flowed into the second variable prize-winning device 650 are distributed to the probable entrance hole 654 and the normal entrance 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable prize winning device 650 in the present modification is replaced with the second variable prize winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then switched to the flow path switching valve 650d. The shaft 650e is abolished. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at a branch position between the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653 (that is, above the portion where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position where the nail is struck may be, for example, upward from the portion where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15) by a distance of about the radius of the sphere. That is, it may be a position where the sphere that has flowed down the guide channel 651 can come into contact (collision), and a position where the sphere can flow down the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the guide channel 651 can easily come into contact (collision) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the sphere is easily repelled in the left direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, since it becomes easy for a ball to flow into the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable prize winning device 650, it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to easily change the special symbol after the big hit. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable prize-winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 651 can easily come into contact (collision) with the right side surface of the nail. It tends to be repelled in the right direction of vision. Therefore, since it becomes easy for a ball to flow into the guide channel 653 provided on the left side of the front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable prize-winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make it difficult to change the special symbol after the big hit. Thus, by setting it as the structure which can adjust the ease of entering into the probability variation entrance 654, the specification of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, the playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  In addition, as another specific example configured to be able to change the rate at which the special symbol shifts to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot, in place of the nails 921a and 921b in the present modification, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is in an open state. A variable member that switches between a closed state and a closed state may be provided. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set in the open state and the period set in the closed state You may comprise so that a hole can adjust a ratio. More specifically, for example, an operation means that can be set in a plurality of states, such as a dip switch, is provided. For example, if the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is not set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set in a state where it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. And if the state of a switch has shown (11111111B), it constitutes so that the entrance of storage device 600 may always be set as a closed state. That is, the ball that flows into the storage device 600 in the jackpot is eliminated, and the state where the ball flows most easily into the second specific winning port 650a is set. When the dip switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the closed period may be longer as it goes from (00000000B) to (11111111B). That is, it may be configured such that as it goes to (11111111B), it becomes easier for a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the probability change state of the special symbol is easily set after the end of the jackpot. If configured in this way, a hole in which the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine that is unlikely to be in a certain state of a special symbol is, for example, a closed state in which the variable member is in a closed state of 0.5 seconds What is necessary is just to adjust the setting of a dip switch so that it may repeat an open state. Conversely, in a hole where the pachinko machine 10 is to be used as a gaming machine that is likely to be in a probable state of special symbols, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state of 2.5 seconds and an open state of 0.5 seconds. You can adjust the dip switch settings. Thereby, since the specs of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall, it is possible to provide highly versatile game playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured so that the guide channel 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a, and one sphere can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. Then, in a state where the balls are stored, it is easy for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e with many payout balls. In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, it is configured such that a ball can easily enter a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 with a small number of winning balls to be paid out. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to be in an open state when the player operates the release button 800. That is, if the storage valve 704a is in a closed state, a ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e (award). If there is a possibility that a lot of balls can be acquired but a prize ball may not be obtained, the gambling state is high). A state where the player can enter the mouth (medium value winning entrance) 701 (a state where a small amount of the prize ball can be stably acquired). Therefore, since the player can switch the gameability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player can select the gameability that suits his taste. It was configured to be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in this modification, it is comprised so that a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored spheres, the entrance of the sphere is easy to enter (the entrance to the general winning entrance 702 is easier or the entrance is made) It is configured to change easily. That is, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls, it is easily recognized whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

  The only difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is the difference in the internal structure of the storage device 700. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, a storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, a maximum of two spheres can be stored in the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two spheres are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in a right lower direction when viewed from the front. For this reason, most of the spheres that first flowed into the guide channel 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the guide channel 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 87, the upper part of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704 is longer than that in the second embodiment. In addition, the guide channel 704 does not have a width that allows two spheres to be arranged horizontally. For this reason, when one sphere is stored to the right inside the guide channel 704 and another sphere flows into the guide channel 704, in many cases a new sphere is newly added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. The sphere is stored (a new sphere is stored between the previously stored sphere and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide channel 704).

  In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored sphere is on the right side, and the second stored sphere is stored on the left side), the spheres that subsequently flow into the storage device 700 are It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the traveling direction of the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes to the right due to an impact caused by a collision (contact) with the stored sphere. That is, the ball flows into the guide channel 708 and enters one of the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e.

  As described above, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can be flowed into the storage device 700, the ball enters the outlets (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e. The player cannot get a prize ball because it is balled. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is a disadvantageous state for the player.

  In addition, in the guide channel 704, an entrance sensor 704b that detects a sphere when a sphere is present in front of the front view is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a. With this incoming sensor 704b, the arrangement of the spheres can be determined. More specifically, when a ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) by the incoming ball sensor 704b, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is obtained. By determining whether or not the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is made, an image that prompts the player to press release button 800 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (see FIG. 89). ) Can be displayed. As a result, a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to enter the outlets (small-value winning award) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous for the player. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example when two spheres are stored will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game ball that first flows into the guide channel 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left with respect to the guide channel 704, and is the second guide channel. A sphere that has flowed into 704 is stored to the right with respect to the guide channel 704. In the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the sphere that subsequently flows into the storage device 700 easily collides (contacts) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, since the flow direction of the ball colliding (contacting) with the stored ball is likely to change to the left, the number of awarded balls (six payouts) is generally reduced by flowing down the guide channel 706. It becomes easy to enter the winning entrance (high value winning entrance) 702.

  In this way, in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 by flowing the ball into the storage device 700. This is an advantageous state for a player who can expect to win a prize ball each time a ball flows in.

  In addition, since the storage valve 704a is inclined in the downward direction to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is difficult to realize compared to the storage state shown in FIG. For example, when two spheres flow into the guide channel 704 almost simultaneously after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the sphere that first reaches the storage valve 704a, the storage valve 704a and the guide channel 704 This can be realized, for example, when the second sphere flows into the guide channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

  Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but in this modification as well, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. . That is, the storage state can be reset and the sphere can be stored in the storage device 700 in the hope that the storage state shown in FIG. 88 will be obtained again. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of setting the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, it is possible to give a sense of achievement to the player and to keep the ball entering the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a sense of expectation that you can get more balls.

  In addition, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the entrance sensor 704b (the sphere does not shield the front side of the entrance sensor 704b), so even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image that prompts the player to press the release button 800 (see FIG. 89). Therefore, it is possible to continue an advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) that prompts the user to press the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) that prompts the user to press the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image that is displayed when it is determined that an unfavorable arrangement for the player shown in FIG. 87 continues for a certain time (one minute). More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected for one minute by the ball entering sensor 704b, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “Unfavorable placement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 is unfavorable for the player (the arrangement in which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e). Can be recognized. In addition, a character “Reset placement by pressing a button!” Is displayed below the character “Unfavorable placement”. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is resolved if the release button 800 is pressed (operated).

  As described above, in this modified example, an unfavorable arrangement is informed to the player by the suggestion display image, and by pressing (operating) the release button 800, the unfavorable arrangement is urged and an advantageous arrangement (FIG. 88) is displayed. The game can be performed with the aim of the ball being arranged to be guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) has passed in a state unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Instead of this, the storage valve 704a may be switched to an open state (release state). That is, when a ball is continuously detected for a certain time (for example, 1 minute) by the ball entering sensor 704b, it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is reset. For this purpose, the storage valve 704a may be opened. Thereby, even if it is a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage apparatus 700, it can suppress playing a game for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

  In this modified example, the storage valve 704a is opened when a ball is detected continuously for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). ) Is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period during which the player is in a disadvantageous state can be shortened. In addition, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency with which the suggestion display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. The electrical configuration in the modification of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed with respect to the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that an incoming ball sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Since other electrical configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantageous time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n are added to the RAM 223 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used to determine the elapsed time after the disadvantageous arrangement for the player shown in FIG. 87 (the state where the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e). The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by 1 every time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). In addition, in a state where the counter value is added (a state of a value greater than 0), if no ball is detected by the incoming sensor 228, the counter value is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m, when it is determined that the arrangement is disadvantageous for the player shown in FIG. 87 (the state where the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e), Control is performed to display the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89).

  The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If it is off, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. Show. This suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received, the storage valve 704a is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in this modification is demonstrated.

  Of the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, the same processes as S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are performed in S1801 to S1817. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is completed, a release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is then executed ( S1821), the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the release suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball sensor 228 is on (S4501). If it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantageous time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by one (every 1 ms) every time the main process (see FIG. 91), the counter value 60000 corresponds to one minute.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has elapsed since the disadvantageous arrangement has occurred. A display rear image change command for displaying the display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the incoming ball sensor 228 has not detected a ball (the incoming ball sensor is OFF) (S4501: No), the placement is not disadvantageous (see FIG. 87). Therefore, it is first determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S4507). If it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507: Yes) as a result of the determination in S4507, the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantageous time counter 223m has been initialized and it is not necessary to initialize again, so the processing of S4508 is skipped. Then, this process ends.

  By executing the release suggestion display process (S1821), the player may play a game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. Among the command determination processes, the processes of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 execute the same processes as the processes of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment. . Moreover, in the command determination process in this modification, when it is determined that the storage state command is received from the main control device 110 in the process of S1921 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. The storage state command process is executed (S1929), and this process ends.

  Details of the storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the storage state command process (S1929). In the storage state command process (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command notifies that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). And when it determines with having been notified that it switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601: Yes), next, the image (refer FIG. 63 (a)) corresponding to a closed state is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. Accordingly, a display rear image change command for display is set (S4602), and the storage state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. And migrate.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4601 that the notification by the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (notification of switching to the open state (release state)) (S4601: No) Then, a display rear image change command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image corresponding to the opened state (released state) (see FIG. 63B) is set (S4605), and the storage valve In order to indicate that the current state of 704a is an open state (release state), the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S4606). Then, in order to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  In the process of S4604 executed after the process of S4603 or S4607, in order to determine whether or not it is a ball throwing period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is peeled, a flow time counter 223l is used. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this process ends. By executing this storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured to store two spheres inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the sphere is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states are different from each other in the entrance where the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can easily enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily determined visually. Therefore, the player can select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by once setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

  Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the general winning port 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the out port shown in FIG. 87). By providing the above, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). And even if it is a case where it becomes an unfavorable storage state (refer to FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game is aimed again at an advantageous storage state (refer to FIG. 88). Can be performed. In addition, it is possible to give a player a sense of accomplishment by entering an advantageous storage state, and gaining a lot of prize balls by continuing to enter the ball into the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 702 You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, two balls are stored inside the storage device 700, but the invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure that can store three or more balls may be used. . In this case, if the incoming ball sensor 228 is provided on the left side in the vicinity of the upper end of the guide channel 704, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the entrance sensor 228 is disadvantageously arranged to be guided to the outlet.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, is the placement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 disadvantageous for the player by providing the ball sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide channel 704 to the left? Although it has been configured so that it can be determined whether or not, the attachment position of the entrance sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, the guide channel 704 may be disposed on the right side in the vicinity of the upper end. That is, when the sphere stored in the storage device 700 has the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored sphere is not detected by the incoming sensor 228, but when the arrangement has the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, The incoming ball sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the incoming ball sensor 228. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the ball is easy to enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the incoming ball sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the incoming ball sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, based on the fact that the stored balls are in an advantageous arrangement, the fact that the arrangement is advantageous to the player shown in FIG. 88 is notified that the present is in an advantageous state for the player. Can do. As a notification method, for example, the characters “In advantageous placement” and the characters “Right-handed! Great chance!” Are displayed on the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. May be. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the present is in an advantageous state, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated), and the ball stored in the storage device 700 is caused to flow down. (Advantageous resetting) can be suppressed.

  Further, the number of entering sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of entering sensors may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entrance sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guide channel 704 toward the right and the left. Thereby, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect a sphere for 5 seconds, for example. Moreover, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect a sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (disadvantageous to the player who is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e), the game is displayed by displaying the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89). It is possible to prompt the person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. In addition, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (an arrangement that is advantageous to the player who is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image that informs that the arrangement is advantageous to the player (for example, “advantageous” By displaying the characters “Arranged” and the characters “Right-handed, big chance!” Displayed in the small area Ds2, it is possible to recognize that the current state is advantageous, Motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to incline in a downward direction toward the lower right, but the inclination may be reversed. This makes it easy to realize a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous for the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch a ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. Thereby, it can be made completely random whether it will be in an advantageous storage state or an unfavorable storage state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage state may be periodically reset such that the storage valve 704a is set to an open state during a big hit. If the player is completely left with the opportunity to reset the storage state, once the advantageous storage state (see Fig. 88) is reached, the game is continued while the storage state is maintained, and there is no need for a hole. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the advantageous storage state continues for a long time, so that disadvantages to the hole can be prevented.

  In the present modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but is not limited thereto. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Thereby, a game can be started with respect to each player in the period when the storage valve 704a is in the state suitable for one's taste.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to switch to the open state (released state) once a minute. May be. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. Thereby, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the outlets (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. Thus, a game can be performed in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, in the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the spheres are easily guided to the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. In order not to miss the game, the game can be played in the hope of continuing to be out of the lottery. Therefore, since a different lottery result can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay. Furthermore, a lottery probability of whether or not to set the storage valve 704a to an open state (release state) may be configured so that a hall clerk or the like can adjust. Thereby, when a player selects one table from which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are to be played, it is possible to predict a table with a good lottery probability and to select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hall, the player's interest can be improved at the stage selection stage before the game is started. .

  In the present modification, the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general gaming machine is provided, and therefore an effect that explains the game performance related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) that explains the conditions for opening the storage valve 704a, the merits and demerits when the storage valve 704a is opened, is displayed. You may comprise. Thereby, a player can understand game nature easily. Further, the back surface type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured such that the back surface type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, the player who is used to the game in the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game can change the back type so that the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during a period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during a predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. With this configuration, it is only necessary to operate the release button 800 when it is desired to switch the state, so that the number of player operations can be reduced. Contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operation may be provided. Even if comprised in this way, similarly to this embodiment, each player can be made to select the game nature suitable for his own taste.

  In this modification, when a certain time (1 minute) has elapsed since the placement is unfavorable for the player shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to cancel the player. The button 800 is configured to prompt the user to press (operate), but the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be configured integrally (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are connected. May be electrically connected to each other). When it is determined that the ball has been detected continuously for a certain period (one minute) or longer by the incoming ball sensor 704b (that is, the placement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. Thus, it may be configured such that the variation type that the development develops can be easily selected. Accordingly, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set to the open state (release state). In general, the player observes the result of the fluctuating effect that informs whether or not it is a big hit most interestingly, so when the fluctuating effect that develops the effect by the depressing of the frame button 22 is executed, it is ensured that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

  In the present modification, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handed, but this is not limitative. It is not something that can be done. For example, you may provide the 1st specific prize opening 65a downstream of the storage apparatus 700 similarly to 1st Embodiment. As a result, the ball can be caused to flow into the first specific winning port 65a and the storage device 700 simply by making a right strike in the special game state (big win state). Can do more. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are slid and moved to the front side of the front view and the back side of the front view, thereby providing each storage valve. While the flow path is closed and the sphere can be stored in the upper part, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand upright vertically with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve falls down in the downstream direction of the flow path. You may comprise a flow path so that a ball | bowl can pass. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes to the front side when viewed from the front, the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 is partially opened. You may comprise so that it may become. Moreover, what is necessary is just to set the width | variety of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a so that the width | variety of an open part may be below the diameter of a bulb | ball. Thereby, the price reduction of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be achieved. Further, when the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 are set in an open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 may not be completely opened. . That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may protrude from the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704. Moreover, you may comprise so that the width | variety of the open part in the guidance flow path 607 or the guidance flow path 704 may be more than the diameter of a sphere. Thereby, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed to switch the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. In addition, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, and the momentum of the flow may be cut off. (It can be made difficult to be stored (held) at the position of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a). Therefore, the same operation as that of each of the above embodiments can be realized with this configuration. That is, a state in which a sphere can be stored on the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 and a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the guide channel 607 and the guide channel 704 flow down downstream can be formed. .

  In each said embodiment, although both ends were made into the out mouth among each entrance opening provided in each storage device, you may abolish the out mouth of both ends. Even if the out mouth is abolished and used as an inner wall, the ball can enter another entrance. Moreover, the storage device can be made more compact by eliminating the outlets at both ends.

  In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device. However, instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the game board 13 in front view. It is good also as a channel which makes a ball flow down to (refer to Drawing 2). As a result, it is possible to make one out port, and it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of discharged balls. Therefore, since the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a sphere can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, one sphere (first embodiment, modified example of the first embodiment, and second embodiment) or two spheres (modified example of the second embodiment) is stored in the upper part of the storage valve. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to store three or more spheres. Further, when a plurality of spheres are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or arranged so as to be stored side by side. In this case, the number of spheres stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be configured to be countable. For example, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment may be configured such that five balls can be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a is opened when the fifth ball is stored. . As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls all flow down to the general prize opening (large value prize opening) 602, so that a large number (5 × 15) of prize balls are paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, since it can be made to feel that a ball | bowl is stored inside the storage apparatus 600, a player's willingness to play can be raised.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power supply is shut off. That is, when the shutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of the power supply shutoff is returned to the state. May be. As a result, it is possible to suppress a fraud in which a ball is inserted into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is shut off, and an award ball is immediately acquired upon power recovery.

  In each of the above embodiments, the entrance (winning entrance) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guide channel through which the ball has flowed (that is, the arrangement of each entrance) Is fixed), but is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be configured to be changed regularly or randomly. More specifically, a known croon or the like may be provided on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning opening (ball entry) may be provided in an annular shape on the croon. And you may give randomness to the winning opening (entrance entrance) into which the ball which flowed down each guidance channel flows by rotating a croon. Thereby, the player can be watched interestingly with respect to the entrance where the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible. However, the inside of the storage device may be configured to be difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve is configured to be controlled to be opened and closed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but is not limited thereto. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the processing load of MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute, without delay, the selection process of variation effects, the special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters each entrance (award), the number of award balls according to the type of the entrance (award) is paid out. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a pachinko machine of a type in which a prize ball is not given as a game value such as a sealed pachinko machine, for example, a prepaid card used for a game depending on the type of a ball entrance (winning entrance) into which the ball entered You may comprise so that a balance may be increased.

  You may combine all or one part of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (Award balls are given to balls that enter the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, a ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, Based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, the specific privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player compared to when the game ball flows down the second flow path, A first distribution state in which game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path than the first distribution state. A flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution state; and a setting means that can set the state of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the gaming state. A gaming machine A1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one provided with a plurality of winning openings through which a winning ball is paid out by winning a ball. Some of these conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls, by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. There are (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be earned by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning a prize, the player usually decides whether or not to win A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to continue to launch game balls in the same direction until they were successful. Therefore, when a player strikes a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be poorly changed. That is, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the player is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. A first distribution state in which game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path than the first distribution state. In addition, the channel distribution means is varied. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed at least between the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easier to give a specific privilege when the game ball flows into the specific channel, and the game set to the second distribution state In a state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player launches a game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given according to the game state can be made different, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A1, a normal ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter and a predetermined amount based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a gaming value granting unit for granting a gaming value, wherein the specific privilege granting unit gives a gaming value greater than the predetermined gaming value as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a normal entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined value is given by the game value giving means based on the game ball entering the normal entry means. Game value is given. More specific game value than the predetermined game value is given as the specific privilege by the specific privilege giving means.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game ball flows into the specific channel compared to the gaming state set to the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. Therefore, since the game value given according to a game state can be varied, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Gaming state setting means for setting a state, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distributing means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the gaming state setting means sets the privilege gaming state. A gaming machine A3, which is set to

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Set to Based on the fact that the privilege state is set by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is set to the privilege gaming state, in addition to being advantageous to the player depending on the privilege gaming state, more game value is given by flowing the game ball into the specific flow path. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, the privilege gaming state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the privilege gaming state.

  In the gaming machine A3, variable entry means that can be changed between a first entry state in which a game ball can enter and a second entry state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first entry state. And a specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the gaming state setting means based on being set in the privilege gaming state. And a variable control means for varying the variable entry means to the first entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable entry means is varied between a first entry state in which a game ball can enter and a second entry state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first entry state. A specific game value is given by the specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means sets the privilege gaming state, the variable control means changes the variable entry means to the first entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, and a specific game value can be obtained by launching the ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, since the player can acquire more game value in the privilege game state, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value giving means gives a predetermined amount of game media as the predetermined game value when a game ball enters the normal ball entry means, The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the specific privilege granting unit grants a larger amount of game media than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege when a game ball enters the pitching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, when a game ball enters the normal entry means, a predetermined amount of game medium is given as a predetermined game value by the game value giving means. When the game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege giving means, a larger amount of game media than the predetermined amount is given as the specific privilege.

  Thereby, since the player can play a game using the assigned game medium, the game can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable entry means from the second entry state to the first entry state based on the gaming state setting means being set to the privilege game state. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state different from the privilege gaming state based on the variable control means changing the variable pitching means by the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable entry means is changed from the second entry state to the first entry state by the variable control means a predetermined number of times based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. A gaming state different from the privilege gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the variable pitching means being varied a predetermined number of times by the variable control means.

  This gives the player a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable entry means in one privilege gaming state, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege gaming state can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the specific value providing means provides a specific amount of gaming media as the specific gaming value.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of game media is given as a specific game value by the specific value giving means, so that the player is given by the given game media. Can play a game. Therefore, the player can play the game for a longer time, and there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel is provided, and the variable pitching means includes the specific flow among the game balls flowing into the guide channel. A gaming machine A8, wherein a gaming ball that has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where it can enter.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel, and the game ball flowing into the guide channel is transferred to the specific channel. Since a variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has not flowed in can enter, the player can simply launch the game ball into the guide channel in the privileged game state, and the variable flow ball and the specific flow channel. A sphere can flow into the means. Therefore, since a specific privilege and a specific game value can be acquired in the special game state, the merit of the player in the special game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the special game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the game machine has a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number counted by the counting means. The variable entry means is changed to the second entry state based on the fact that the bonus game state is set, and the game state setting means is configured to allow the special game to be executed when a specific condition is established in the special game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means to the first in at least a predetermined period from when the privilege game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 that is set to one distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. Based on at least the number counted by the counting means reaching the predetermined number, the variable pitching means is changed to the second pitching state by the variable control means. When the specific condition is established in the privilege game state, a game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means. The flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state by the setting unit at least for a predetermined period from when the privilege game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to a predetermined number of game balls entering the variable entry means. Therefore, more game balls can flow into the specific flow path before reaching the predetermined number, and the game can be performed during the privilege game state in the hope that the specific privilege is given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the privileged gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, an entry detection means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal entry means, and the entry detection means to the normal entry means during the bonus game state. And a notifying means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that a game ball has entered the gaming machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the entrance detection means detects that a game ball has entered the normal entrance means, and the entrance detection means detects the bonus game. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal entry means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the notification means. When a failure that is not set to the first distribution state occurs, the player can be made aware of the failure by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem can be solved quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow compared to the second flow path, The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path as the first distribution state and closes the first flow path as the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first distribution state. A gaming machine A11, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific channel is easily guided in a state where the channel is closed.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are produced. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in compared to the second flow path. The flow path distributing means opens the first flow path as the first distribution state, and closes the first flow path as the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path with the first flow path closed is easily guided.

  Thereby, the flow path in which the game ball which flowed into the specific flow path flows down can be changed according to whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if a game ball is continuously launched toward a specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distributing means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls upstream from the closed position. And the second flow path is in contact with the held game ball and the game ball flowing into the specific flow path in a state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path. Thus, the gaming machine A12 is provided at a position where it can easily flow in based on the change in the flow direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A11, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held upstream of the closed position by the flow path distribution means. Based on a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls come into contact with the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path, and the flow direction changes. The 2nd flow path is provided in the position which becomes easy to flow in.

  As a result, even if the game ball continues to be launched toward the specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, it is provided with display means for displaying an image, and display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distributing means. Characteristic gaming machine A13.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control unit controls the display unit so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distribution unit is displayed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distributing means.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means sets the specific flow path when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state. A gaming machine A14 that displays an image that suggests that a privilege is likely to be given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A13, specified when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the fact that the flow distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means The display control means displays an image that suggests that the above-mentioned privilege is easily given. Thereby, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch the flow path of another sphere with the sphere held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a position at which a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter First entering means, first giving means for giving a first game value based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and a game flowing down the second flow path The first game that is given by the first giving means based on the second ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second giving means for giving a second game value different from the value; a first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path; A variable that allows the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path to be changed to a second position that is difficult to be held on the first flow path as compared to the position. And a switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the variable means holding the game ball and holding the game A gaming machine B1 that facilitates guiding a gaming ball to the second flow path by a ball.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one provided with a plurality of winning openings through which a winning ball is paid out by winning a ball. Some of these conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls, by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. There are (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be earned by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning a prize, the player usually decides whether or not to win A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to continue to launch game balls in the same direction until they were successful. Therefore, when a player strikes a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be poorly changed. That is, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. First entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the first granting means makes a first entry based on the game ball entering the first entry means. The game value of is given. In addition, the second giving means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first granting means is based on the game ball entering the second entering means. A second game value different from the first game value to be given is given by the second grant means. A first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the first flow path as compared to the first position is on the first flow path. The variable means is changed to the second position that is difficult to be held in the position. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

  Thereby, even if the player continues to fire the game ball toward the specific flow path, the entrance means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first game value given by the first grant unit is higher in game value than the second game value given by the second grant unit. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game value given by the first grant means is configured so that the game value is higher than the second game value given by the second grant means. It is possible to feel that the game ball wants to flow into the specific flow path in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the special gaming state advantageous to the player is set based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Variable entry that can be changed between a game state setting means, a first entry state in which a game ball can enter, and a second entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter compared to the first entry state. A means for giving a specific game value based on a game ball entering the means and a variable ball entry means; and setting the bonus game state by the game state setting means. And variable control means for changing the variable entry means to the first entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the switching means is set to the privilege gaming state by the gaming state setting means. Based on said variable Gaming machine B3, characterized in that the stage from the first position in which switching to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Set to The variable entry means is varied between a first entry state in which a game ball can enter and a second entry state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first entry state. A specific game value is given by the specific value giving means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means sets the privilege gaming state, the variable entry means is changed to the first entry state by the variable control means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, in addition to the fact that the player can acquire a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be increased, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine B3 is provided with a guide channel capable of guiding a game ball to the specific channel, and the variable entry means is a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel. A gaming machine B4, which is provided at a position where a ball can be entered.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the induction channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

  Thus, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific flow path and the variable pitching means simply by launching the game ball into the guide flow path in the privilege game state. Therefore, since the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired in the privilege game state, the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the special game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path that is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path and a position where a game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter. A third ball entry means provided and a third game value different from the second game value given by the second grant means based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. A third granting means for granting a game value, and the variable means holds the game ball by holding the game ball in the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 that is easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second grant means is given by the third grant means. By holding the game ball by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

  As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can enter both the second and third ball entry means. Become. That is, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value having different game values, the game value acquired by the player can be given randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first game value is given by the first giving means by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path entering the first ball entering means. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different game characteristics can be realized depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the third game value given by the third grant means is higher in game value than the first game value given by the first grant means. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third granting unit has a gaming value higher than the first gaming value given by the first granting unit. Thus, the game ball can be expected to flow down the third flow path in a state where the game ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, the traveling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path can be more interestingly observed by the player, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the game ball on the first flow path, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path as the arrangement of the held game balls is the second flow path. The first arrangement that is easily guided to the flow path and the second arrangement that is easier to be guided to the third flow path than the first arrangement are capable of being held. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game balls. 1 and the second arrangement that is more easily guided to the third flow path than the first arrangement.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the flow path through which the player can easily enter the game ball only by confirming the arrangement of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine B7, determination means for determining whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means A gaming machine B8 comprising an execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the determining means whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determining means is executed by the effect executing means. There is an effect that the player can more easily discriminate the flow path into which the game ball easily flows.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, there is provided an adjusting means capable of adjusting a ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path, respectively. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the gaming balls that flowed into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means. Since it is adjusted, it can be set as the gaming machine in which the second privilege is easily given according to the sales policy of the hall, or the gaming machine in which the third privilege is easily given. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, an operating means that can be operated by a player and a detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means are provided, and the switching means is configured to operate the operating means by the detecting means. A gaming machine B10, wherein the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the operation with respect to the operation means is detected by the detection means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the detection of the operation on the operating means by the detecting means.

  As a result, it is possible to switch whether or not the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path is allowed to flow down to the first entrance means, so that each player has a personal preference. There is an effect that the state can be set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the variable means can hold only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, since only one gaming ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, the variable means is changed to the first position. Thus, when the player quits the game, the game ball remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost when quitting the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability variation rate is varied by adjusting the ratio of the balls entering the holding device)
A specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a first incoming ball provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. A first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on the means, a game ball entering the first pitching means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is granted based on the second entry means provided at a position where the entry is possible and the game ball entering the second entry means. Second privilege providing means capable of adjusting, and adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one provided with a plurality of winning openings through which a winning ball is paid out by winning a ball. Some of these conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls, by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. There are (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be earned by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning a prize, the player usually decides whether or not to win A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to continue to launch game balls in the same direction until they were successful. Therefore, if a player plays a game on the same type of gaming machine, as long as the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball will continue to win the same prize opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be poorly changed. There was a case. That is, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which game balls can flow down. A first entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the first entry means, 1 privilege is granted. Different from the first privilege based on the fact that the second entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game ball enters the second entry means. A 2nd privilege is provided by a 2nd privilege provision means. The ratio at which the game balls flowing down the specific flow path flow into the first and second incoming means is adjusted by the adjusting means.

  Thereby, it can be set as the gaming machine in which a 1st privilege is easily provided by adjusting an adjustment means, or can be set as a gaming machine in which a 2nd privilege is easy to be provided. Therefore, even if it is the same model, it is possible to realize different gaming properties by changing the adjustment degree by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and a bonus game for giving a special game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result A first lottery state with a high probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result, and a second lottery state with a lower probability of the specific lottery result than the first lottery state. A lottery state setting unit that can be set, and the first privilege granting unit controls the first lottery state to be set by the lottery state setting unit as the first privilege. A gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game is performed when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A privilege game advantageous to the user is granted by the privilege game giving means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state where the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result is high and the second lottery state where the probability that the lottery result becomes the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . Control is performed by the first privilege granting unit so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting unit as the first privilege.

  Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, according to the business policy of the hall, the first lottery state is easily set and the gameability is likely to become a privilege gaming state, or the first lottery state is difficult to be set and the second bonus is likely to be given. You can adjust what to do. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege, the gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of gaming media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, and therefore, it is easy to apply a predetermined amount of gaming media. Can be adjusted by adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether the game is easy to be given a predetermined amount of game media or the game is easy to be given the first privilege according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a first position at which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. Variable means that can be changed to a position, and variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the bonus game being given by the bonus game granting means; A gaming machine C4, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means can change the first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means compared to the first position. Is done. The variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means based on the provision of the special game by the special game providing means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, since it becomes easy to give a 1st privilege in a privilege game state, there exists an effect that a player's expectation with respect to a privilege game can be raised.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on at least a predetermined time since the variable means has been changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on at least a predetermined time elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the rarity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine for playing a game, it is possible to select the gaming machine in consideration of the adjustment level of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that the pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be given. .

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering, and the specific game value based on the game ball entering A low value entry means to which a small game value is given, and the second flow path includes a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific entry means, and the low value entry means. A first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a first variable position thereof. A game machine C6, comprising: a position variable means capable of changing the game ball flowing into the specific flow path to a second variable position that is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the low value ball entry means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific entry means and a low value flow path for flowing down to the low value entry means. A first variable position that can hold at least one game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path compared to the first variable position is held on the specific flow path The position variable means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to be performed.

  As a result, even if the player continues to fire the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means for entering the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path in accordance with the variable position of the position variable means. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C6 includes holding control means for controlling the position variable means to be changed to the second variable position based on the reward game being given by the privilege game giving means, and the specific flow path Is arranged at a position where game balls that have flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow in compared to the low-value flow path, and the position variable means holds the game balls by holding them. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the gaming ball is easily guided to the low-value flow path by the gaming ball being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced. That is, the position variable means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means on the basis that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where game balls that have flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow in compared to the low-value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position changing means, the game ball is guided to the low value flow path by the held game ball.

  Thereby, the ball entry means into which the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path can be made different depending on the variable position of the position variable means and whether or not the game ball is held by the position variable means. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the game machine C9 is characterized in that the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are configured by one member, the position and the position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means increases the rate at which the gaming balls flowing down to the specific flow path flow into the first entering means, and the gaming balls are added to the second entering. The ratio of flowing into the ball means is decreased, and when the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entering means is decreased, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second ball entering means is increased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is played when the ratio at which the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path flows into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. In addition, when the ratio at which the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path flows into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio at which the game ball flows into the second flow path is increased.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to easily flow into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one provided with a plurality of winning openings through which a winning ball is paid out by winning a ball. Some of these conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player ejects the game balls, by varying the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. There are (for example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177).
However, since the number of prize balls that can be earned by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning a prize, the player usually decides whether or not to win A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to continue to launch game balls in the same direction until they were successful. Therefore, when a player strikes a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be poorly changed. That is, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a specific flow path that branches into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball that flows down the first flow path. Based on the ball entry means provided at the position where the ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means, the player is compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path. Compared to a specific privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous, a first distribution state in which game balls that have flowed into the specific flow channel are easily distributed to the first flow channel, and the first distribution state The flow path distributing means that can be changed to the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and the state of the flow path distribution means is at least the first distribution state according to the game state. Setting means capable of being set to the second distribution state
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein a normal entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the normal entry means. Game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the game, and the specific privilege giving means gives a game value larger than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege. It is given.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 3, in the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. And a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to a privilege gaming state advantageous to a player, and the setting means is based on the fact that the gaming state setting means has set the privilege gaming state. Then, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When a ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the player is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. A first distribution state in which game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path than the first distribution state. In addition, the channel distribution means is varied. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed at least between the first distribution state and the second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.
As a result, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easier to give a specific privilege when the game ball flows into the specific channel, and the game set to the second distribution state In a state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player launches a game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given according to the game state can be made different, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a normal entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined value is given by the game value giving means based on the game ball entering the normal entry means. Game value is given. More specific game value than the predetermined game value is given as the specific privilege by the specific privilege giving means.
Thereby, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game ball flows into the specific channel compared to the gaming state set to the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. Therefore, since the game value given according to a game state can be varied, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Set to Based on the fact that the privilege state is set by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.
As a result, when the gaming state is set to the privilege gaming state, in addition to being advantageous to the player depending on the privilege gaming state, more game value is given by flowing the game ball into the specific flow path. It becomes easy to be done. Therefore, the privilege gaming state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the privilege gaming state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a First specific winning opening (variable pitching means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 firing control device (launching means)
113 Sound lamp control device (display control means)
601 General prize opening (normal entry method)
602 General prize winning entrance
606 Guide channel (second channel)
607 Guide channel (first channel)
607a Storage valve (variable means)
650a Second specific prize opening (variable entry means)
701 General winning entrance (normal entry means)
702 General winning entrance (entrance means)
704 Guide channel (first channel)
704a Storage valve (variable means)
708 Guide channel (second channel)
S218 variable game execution means S305 discrimination means S1103 setting means S1106 variable control means S1302 setting means S1944 counting means S4003, S4007 setting means

Claims (2)

A first variable state in which a game ball launched in a specific direction can be entered, a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and a second in which the game ball is difficult to enter than in the first variable state. Variable entry means that can be changed to a variable state;
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
A variable game execution in which the variable entry means executes a variable game that is varied a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state based on the determination result by the determination means. Means,
A specific flow path which is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can flow down and branches into a first flow path and a second flow path;
A ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a privilege grant means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player;
A game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow down the first flow path than the second flow path, and a first state where the game balls flow down the second flow path more easily than the first flow path. Variable means that can be changed to the second state,
During execution of the variable game, said variable while the ball entrance means is a variable in the second variable condition, the variable means is varied before Symbol first state, the variable ball entrance means before Symbol first variable while being variable in a state, and a variable control means capable of performing the control for varying prior Symbol second state said varying means,
The game is characterized in that the first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball that has been launched in the specific direction and has not entered the variable ball entry means can flow in. Machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising launching means capable of launching a game ball.

Images